Integra RDC 7.1 User Manual To The 1797e61f C155 4025 A7a0 3aacfb78b8b7

User Manual: Integra RDC-7.1 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 156

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Controller

RDC-7.1
Instruction Manual

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

WARNING

AVIS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.

Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

10.

11.
12.

13.
14.

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
S3125A
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.

15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
gap for warm air to escape.

Thank you for purchasing an Integra Research AV Controller.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit. Following the instructions in
this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Controller.
Please retain this manual for future reference.

Precautions
Unless it’s for personal use only, recording copyrighted
material is illegal without permission of the copyright holder.

2. AC Fuse
The AC fuse inside the RDC-7.1 is not user-serviceable. If
you cannot turn on the RDC-7.1, contact your Onkyo dealer.

3. Care
Occasionally you should dust the RDC-7.1 all over with a
soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth dampened
with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the
RDC-7.1 immediately afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t
use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical
solvents, because they may damage the finish or remove
the panel lettering.

4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST
TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make sure
that the voltage in your area meets the voltage requirements
printed on the RDC-7.1’s rear panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or
AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The Worldwide model has a voltage selector for compatibility
with power systems around the world. Before you plug in this
model, make sure that the voltage selector is set to the correct
voltage for your area.

For USA, Canadian, and Australian models
Setting the [STANDBY/ON] switch to STANDBY does not
fully shutdown the RDC-7.1. If you do not intend to use the
RDC-7.1 for an extended period, remove the power cord from
the AC outlet.

For British Models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply
cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service
personnel.

For U.S. Models
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the
building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC Information for User

CAUTION:
User changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For Canadian Models

IMPORTANT

NOTE:

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or coloured black.
The wire that is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or coloured red.

THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH
CANADIAN ICES-003.
RSS 210, Low Power Licence-Exempt Radiocommunications
Devices (All FrequencyBands).
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:

IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs to
be replaced, the replacement fuse must be approved by ASTA
or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating as that
indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI
mark on the body of the fuse.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR
THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE
FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF
AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF
SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG
IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMPERE SOCKET.
If in any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.

Getting Started

1. Recording Copyright

CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE
OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

Modèle Canadien
REMARQUE:
CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST
CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003 DU CANADA.
CNR-210, Dispositifs de radiocommunications de faible
puissance, exempts de licence (pour toutes les bandes de
fréquences).
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:

ATTENTION:
POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE
LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.

Table of Contents
Getting Started
Important Safety Instructions ..........................2
Precautions ........................................................3
Features .............................................................6
Supplied Accessories .......................................8
Connecting the Supplied Power Cord ............ 8
Before Using the RDC-7.1.................................9
Installing the Batteries .................................... 9
Using the Remote Controller .......................... 9
Index Parts and Facilities ...............................10
Front Panel ................................................... 10
Inner Panel ................................................... 12
Rear Panel.................................................... 14
Front Panel Display ...................................... 15
Remote Controller (Amp Mode).................... 16

Installation and Connections
Speaker Placement .........................................18
Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater
and the Function of Respective Speakers ... 18
Placing the Speakers.................................... 19
Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio.... 20
Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music
Source such as DVD-Audio ....................... 20
Available Speaker Placements According
to the Number of Speakers ........................ 21
Connection Examples................................... 22
Connecting a Power Amplifier .......................25
Connecting a Power Amplifier Using RCA
Type Cables ............................................... 25
Connecting a Power Amplifier Using XLR
Type Cables ............................................... 26
Using Bi-amp Connection ............................. 27
Connecting Antennas .....................................28
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna.............. 28
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna................ 29
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna ............ 29
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna............ 29
Connecting AV Components..........................30
Types of Connection Cables and Terminals.... 30
Connecting Monitors such as TV or Projector ... 32
Connecting a DVD Player............................. 33
Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR
(VIDEO 1)................................................... 34
Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3) ...... 35
Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or
BS/CS Tuner .............................................. 37
Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner.... 38
Connecting a Recording Device such as MD
Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder or
Cassette Deck............................................ 39
Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO)
Terminal ( ) (Other than Chinese model) ... 40
Connection Using HDMI Terminals .............. 43
Connecting
-compatible AV Components...45
Connections for Remote Control (
) ......... 45
Connecting Components not Reached by
the Remote Controller Signals (IR IN)
– USA and Canadian models –...................46
If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach
the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor ..................... 46
Using an External Device with 12V Trigger
Terminal – USA and Canadian models –...47

Connecting Components not Reached by the
Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)
– Other than USA and Canadian models –...48
If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach
the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor...................... 48
If Remote Controller Signal Does not Reach
Other Components ..................................... 49
Using an External Device with 12V Trigger
Terminal – Other than USA and Canadian
models – ...................................................... 49

Operations
Basic Operation of Remote Controller
Buttons ........................................................ 50
To Operate the RDC-7.1 (AMP Mode).......... 50
To Select an Input Source............................. 50
To Operate a Connected Component
(Mode Switching)........................................ 51
To Select a Source in Zone 2 or Zone 3 ....... 51
To Perform a Macro Operation ..................... 51
Customizing Your Remote Controller............ 51
Connecting the Power/Basic Operations ..... 52
Turning on the Power.................................... 52
Operating on the RDC-7.1 ............................ 52
Turning on the Power from the Remote
Controller .................................................... 53
Operating with Remote Controller................. 53
Using the Listening Modes ............................ 58
Selecting the Listening Mode ........................ 61
Listening to Radio Broadcasts...................... 62
Using the Tuner............................................. 62
Tuning into a Radio Station........................... 62
Listening to RDS Broadcasts
(European models only) ............................. 64
Listening to RDS Broadcasts ........................ 64
PTY Program Types in Europe ..................... 64
Displaying Radio Text (RT) ........................... 65
Performing a PTY Scan ................................ 65
Performing a TP Scan................................... 65
Enjoying Multichannel Playback ................... 66
How to Connect............................................. 66
How to Set Up ............................................... 66
Playing Back in Multichannel Sound ............. 67
Adjusting the Volume Level of Speakers
for Multichannel Playback........................... 67
Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote
Zone (Zone 2/3) ........................................... 68
Connecting and Setup................................... 68
Enjoying Movies and Music in a Remote
Zone ........................................................... 69
Recording a Source........................................ 71
Recording Audio/Video While Playing........... 72
Recording Audio/Video on a Component
While Playing Another ................................ 72
Recording the Video from one Source and
the Audio from Another Source .................. 73
Connecting Net Audio – USA, Canada, and
Australian models –.................................... 74
About Net-Tune............................................. 74
Networking Your RDC-7.1............................. 75
Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA,
Canada, and Australian models – ............. 76
About Net-Tune............................................. 76
Networking Your RDC-7.1............................. 77
About Network Configuration ........................ 77

Table of Contents—Continued
Using the Remote Controller......................... 78
Enjoying Internet Radio................................. 80
Playing a Music File Saved on the Net-Tune
Server ......................................................... 82
Configuring the Music Server........................ 84

Setup Menu
Setup Menu...................................................... 86
OSD Map (MAIN A)....................................... 86
OSD Map (MAIN B)....................................... 88
OSD Map (ZONE 2) ...................................... 89
Navigating the Setup Menu........................... 90
Hardware Setup............................................... 91
Remote Control Setup Sub-menu ................. 91
TV Format Sub-menu.................................... 91
AM Frequency Setup Sub-menu
(Asian and Australian Models Only) ........... 91
Speaker/Output Setup .................................... 92
Speaker Configuration Sub-menu................. 92
Speaker Crossover Sub-menu...................... 93
Speaker Distance Sub-menu ........................ 93
Notch Filter Sub-menu .................................. 93
Level Calibration Sub-menu.......................... 94
THX Audio Setup Sub-menu......................... 94
Audio Output Assign Sub-menu.................... 95
Video Output Assign Sub-menu.................... 96
Input Setup ...................................................... 97
Audio Assign Sub-menu (when input is other
than NET AUDIO) ....................................... 98
Music Server Sub-menu (When input is NET
AUDIO) ....................................................... 99
Video Assign Sub-menu................................ 99
Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu............... 100
Character Edit Sub-menu............................ 101
IntelliVolume Sub-menu .............................. 102
Delay Sub-menu ......................................... 102
12V Trigger Assign Sub-menu .................... 102
Listening Mode Setup................................... 103
Mono Setup Sub-menu ............................... 103
Multiplex Setup Sub-menu .......................... 103
Stereo Setup Sub-menu.............................. 104
Direct, Pure Audio Setup Sub-menu ........... 105
Multichannel Input Setup Sub-menu ........... 105
i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio Input Setup
Sub-menu ................................................. 107
i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD Input Setup
Sub-menu ................................................. 108
Dolby Digital Setup Sub-menu .................... 109
DTS Setup Sub-menu ................................. 110
AAC Setup Sub-menu................................. 111
Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6
(2ch Input only) Setup Sub-menu ............. 113
THX Setup Sub-menu ................................. 114
Mono Movie Setup/Enhance Setup/Orchestra
Setup/Unplugged Setup/Studio-Mix Setup/
TV Logic Setup Sub-menu ....................... 115
All Ch Stereo Setup/Full Mono Setup
Sub-menu ................................................. 116
Dolby Virtual Speaker Setup Sub-menu ..... 117
Dolby Headphone Setup Sub-menu ........... 118
Audio Adjust.................................................. 119
Tone Control Sub-menu.............................. 119
Preference ..................................................... 120
Volume Setup Sub-menu ............................ 120
Headphone Level Setup Sub-menu ............ 120

OSD Setup Sub-menu ................................ 120
OSD Position Sub-menu ............................ 120
i.LINK Setup ...................................................121
Wakeup Setup ............................................ 121
OSD for DVD .............................................. 121
OSD for DVD (Zone 2) ............................... 121
System Control Setup................................. 121
Network Setup ...............................................122
IP Address Sub-menu ................................ 122
Proxy Sub-menu ......................................... 122
MAC Address Sub-menu ............................ 122
Client Sub-menu ......................................... 123
Lock/Version Setup.......................................123
Lock Setup Sub-menu ................................ 123
Firmware Version Sub-menu ...................... 123

Using the Remote Controller
Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo
Products Using the Remote Controller ...124
Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo
Products Using the
Connection ........ 124
DVD Mode .................................................. 124
CD Mode .................................................... 126
MiniDisc Mode ............................................ 127
Tape Mode ................................................. 128
Using the Remote Controller with Other
Components...............................................129
Entering a Remote Control Code ............... 129
Learning Commands from Another Remote
Controller.................................................. 136
Using Macros.............................................. 137
Other Settings for the Remote Controller ...139
Editing Remote Controller Modes............... 139
Resetting the Remote Controller ................ 141
Using the Remote Controller with Radio
Frequency (RC-555M only)...................... 141
Changing the Remote Controller’s
Control ID ...................................................142

Miscellaneous
Relationship Between Input Source and
Listening Mode ..........................................143
Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA,
Canada, and Australian models only –......146
Types of the RDC-7.1 Option Boards ......... 146
Installing the Option Boards (USA and
Australian Models Only) ........................... 148
Troubleshooting ............................................149
Power ......................................................... 149
Audio .......................................................... 149
Video .......................................................... 150
Tuner .......................................................... 150
Remote Controller ...................................... 150
Recording ................................................... 151
Zone 2/Zone 3 ............................................ 151
Net-Tune..................................................... 151
Others ......................................................... 151
Error Messages .......................................... 152
Specifications
– USA and Canadian models –.................152
Specifications – Other than USA and
Canadian models –....................................154

Features
Amplifier Features
• 192 kHz/24-Bit DAC for All Channels
• Apogee Master Clock—the best in the industry—for
the highest quality D/A conversion available
• 8 Balanced XLR Outputs for the highest, most
stable, noise-free signal transfer possible
• Color-Coded 7.1 Multi-Channel Inputs and Pre
Outs
• 5 12V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/
Outputs
Audio/Video Features
• THX Ultra2 Certified
• THX Surround EX, DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix 6.1,
DTS NEO:6, DTS 96/24, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby
Pro Logic II/IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual
Surround
• 4 Wideband Component Video Inputs and 2
Output*
• Dual Monitor Outputs (S Video/Composite) to
route the onscreen signal to a small monitor and make
adjustments without distracting the audience
• 12 Digital Inputs (6 Optical/6 Coaxial/12
Assignable) to connect any variety of digital sources
to the RDC-7.1’s powerful digital processor
• 4 Digital Outputs (2 Optical/2 Coaxial/4 Assignable)
to make direct digital dubs to other digital devices
• Wolfson 192 kHz/24-Bit D/A Converters for all
channels
• Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips for high grade main and
multizone decoding
• Non-Scaling Configuration
Next Generation User Interface
• HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)*
• i.Link (IEEE1394) Digital Input for DVD-Audio
and SACD
• Net-Tune Function with MP3/WAV/WMA
Decoding*
• Ethernet Plug-In Capability and 1 Output*
• Bi-Directional RS-232 Port to download new
programs and provide easy interface with
touchscreen controllers from other manufacturers
• Composite and S Video to Component Video*
Upconversion (NTSC and PAL Compatible)
• Speaker A and B Mode for 7.1 Channels
• Bi-Wiring Connectable for FL/FR with SBR/SBL
• Dual 32-Bit DSP Chips for high grade main and
multizone decoding

*Only available as option for the USA and Canadian models

• 5 12V DC Trigger Outputs and 3 IR Inputs/
Outputs for multizone operation of multiple
components
• Individual Crossover Adjustment
FM/AM Tuner Features
• 40 FM/AM Presets*
• FM/AM Auto Tuning*
Other Performance Features
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry)
• Solid Aluminum Volume Knob for quality you can
feel—ergonomically pleasing and convenient for
those quick in-the-dark level changes
• Separate PC Boards to keep audio and video signals
completely separate
• Rec Out Selector (On Front) to tape one program
while watching or listening to another
• Gold-Plated RCA Jacks to resist corrosion and
provide distortion-free signal transmission
• Impeccable Quality Materials—a heavy gauge,
reinforced steel chassis, rigid aluminum panels and
brazen stabilizers to enhance overall chassis stability
• Large Multi-Emitter Output Transistors to provide
faster switching speed, which translates into a wider
dynamic range
• Zone 2 Multiroom/Multisource (audio and video) to
set up additional rooms
• Detachable Heavy Duty IEC Power Cord to
minimize interference from external sources and
increase power stability—detachable for ease of
installation
• Motorized Control Door
• Audiophile Grade Parts
• IntelliVolume
• Pure Audio Mode
• Digital Upsampling
• Absolute Ground Plate
• Large, Fluorescent, 35 Dot Matrix Display With
4 Mode Dimmer
• For Ultimate Control—The Last Remote You’ll
Ever Need
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter added to the end
of the product name indicates the color of the RDC-7.1.
Specifications and operation are the same regardless of
color.

Features—Continued

• Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX Ltd.
• “Net-Tune” is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
• Windows Media and the Windows logo are trandemarks, or
registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other
countries.
• Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and THOMSON multimedia.
• “XiVA” is a registered trademark of Imerge Limited.
• Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
• Niles is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
• Clocked by Apogee is under licence and trademark of Apogee
Electronics, Inc.
“This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use
of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.”

THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it
must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only
then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your
guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give
you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2
requirements define hundreds of parameters, including power
amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier performance and
operation for both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2
receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX
Mode) which accurately translate film soundtracks for home theater
playback.

For European Models

Getting Started

• THX is a trademark or registered trademark of THX Ltd. All
rights reserved.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS,” “DTS 96/24,” “DTS-ES,” and “NEO:6” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• The i.LINK logo is a trademark of Sony Corporation, registered
in the U.S. and other countries.

Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
I. MORI

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

RDC-7.1 provides option boards for advanced
capability.
For details on option boards, see page 146.

Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:

Remote Controller & Three Batteries (AA/R6)

Precautions during unpacking
• The unit is extremely heavy, so be careful when
lifting it so as not to cause an injury. Do not lift
or move the unit by holding it at the door on the
front panel. Doing so may damage the front
door.
• When packaged, the door on the front panel is
taped to the unit. Before use, be sure to remove
this tape.
Taped

Master Volume

Standby/On
Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN)
Rec/ Zone 3 (RED)

Power
On

Off

DVD

Vido 1

Video 2

Video 3

Video 4

Video 5

Video 6

Video 7

Tape 1

Tape 2

Tuner

Phono

Net Audio

AM Loop Antenna (not supplied with USA and Canadian models)

Speaker Labels

Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right
Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right

Center

Surround
Right
Surround
Right

Speaker Cable

Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left

Surround
Right
Surround
Right

Center

Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Surround
Left

Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left

Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right

Center

Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left

Indoor FM antenna (not supplied with USA and
Canadian models)
(connector type varies from country to country)

AV Controller

•

RDC-7.1

The taping for packaging may be different for
your product.

Connecting the Supplied Power Cord
Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied
with the RDC-7.1. The power cord supplied is
designed for use with the RDC-7.1 and should not be
used with any other device.
• Never have the power cord disconnected from the
RDC-7.1 while the other end is plugged into the wall
outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always
connect by plugging into the wall outlet last and disconnect by unplugging from the wall outlet first.

Power Cord
(supplied)

Power Cord
AC INLET

DO NOT connect the
power cord at this time.

(plug type varies from
country to country)

Open/Close

Before Using the RDC-7.1
Installing the Batteries

To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide off the cover.

Using the Remote Controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the RDC-7.1’s
remote control sensor, as shown below. The RDC-7.1’s
[Standby] indicator flashes while a signal is being
received from the remote controller.
Remote control sensor
RDC-7.1

)
m
(5
ft.

30˚

Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.

pr
ox
.

Getting Started

Standby indicator

Put the cover onto the remote controller
and slide it shut.

Notes:
• The supplied batteries should last for about six
months, although this will vary with usage.
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries, or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a
long time, remove the batteries to prevent possible
leakage and corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as
possible to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.

Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the
RDC-7.1 is subjected to bright light, such as direct
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this
in mind when installing the RDC-7.1.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used
in the same room, or the RDC-7.1 is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote
controller may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote
controller, because the buttons may be pressed
inadvertently, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the
RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing the
RDC-7.1.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an
obstacle between it and the RDC-7.1’s remote control
sensor.
• (RC-555M only) You can set the transmission signal
format to infrared (IR), or radio frequency (RF) for
use with the optional RF Receiver. This is useful
when, for example, the RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack
or is not in line of sight of the remote controller.
• To select AMP mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP”
appears on the display.

Index Parts and Facilities
Here is an explanation of the controls and displays on the front panel of the RDC-7.1.
The specifications for your model may differ due to regional requirements.

Front Panel

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

Off

DVD

Video 1

Video 2

Video 3

Video 4

Video 5

Video 6

Video 7

Tape 1

Tape 2

Tuner

Phono

Net Audio

Open/Close

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
For further operational instructions, see the pages
indicated in brackets [ ].

1 Power switch [52]

Getting Started

Press to turn on and off the main power supply for
the RDC-7.1. When the RDC-7.1 is turned on with
the [Power] switch, the [Standby] indicator lights.
• Before turning on the power, check to make sure
that all cords are properly connected.
• When the power is turned on, a sudden surge of
current will occur that may adversely affect the
operation of other devices. To prevent this, do not
plug the RDC-7.1 into the same circuit used by
sensitive equipment, e.g., computers.
2 Standby/On button and On indicator [52]
If pressed with the [Power] switch turned on, the
RDC-7.1 turns on and the display and [On] indicator
light up. If pressed again, the RDC-7.1 returns to the
standby state. In the standby state, the display and
[On] indicator are turned off and the RDC-7.1 cannot
be operated.

3 Standby indicator [9, 52]
Lights when the RDC-7.1 is in the standby state and
when a signal is received from the remote controller.

4 Remote control sensor [9]
5 Front display
6 Master Volume dial [52]
Use to control the volume in the main zone. The
volume for the remote zone (Zone 2 and Zone 3) is
independent.

7 Open/Close button
Press this button to open and close the front door
that covers the lower buttons.

8 Input source buttons and indicators (DVD,
Video 1–7, Tape 1-2, Tuner, Phono, CD, and
Net Audio) [52, 62, 65, 80]
Press these buttons to select the input source for the
main zone. When an input source is selected, the
indicator will light in blue.
To select the input source for the remote zone (Zone
2), first press the [Zone 2] button, and then the
desired input source button.
To select the input source for the remote zone (Zone
3) or recording out (Rec Out), first press the [Rec/
Zone 3] button, and then the desired input source
button.

9 Zone 2 (GRN) and Rec/Zone 3 (RED)
Indicator [70, 72]
For Zone 2, the indicator above the selected input
source button will light green. For recording or
Zone 3, it will light red. When the same input
source is selected for Zone 2 and Rec/Zone 3, it will
light orange.

0 Pure Audio indicator [61]
Lights during pure audio playback.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
Inner Panel
Caution:
The front door of the AV Controller is motorized. Use the [Open/Close] button to open or close the door. Manually
opening or closing the door, or moving the AV Controller while holding the door, will cause the door to malfunction or break.
USA, Canadian, and Australian models

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Off

Display

DSP

Dimmer

Tuning

Preset

Tuning Mode Memory

Setup

Enter

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

European models

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Off

Display

DSP

RT/PTY/TP

Tuning

Preset

Tuning Mode Memory

Setup

Enter

Exit

Phones

Clear

A Zone 2 button [70]
Press this button to enter the Zone 2 configuration
mode. If you want to configure the Zone 2 settings
such as standby/on setting, input source setting,
listening mode, volume adjustment, audio selector
mode, and display settings, press this button first.

B Rec/Zone 3 button [70, 72]
Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button to output to a
recording component for recording purposes or
enter the Zone 3 mode. After pressing the [Rec/
Zone 3] button, press one of the input source
selector buttons within 3 seconds to select the
component. When one is selected, the indicator
above that button will light in red. To record from
the same input source that you are using (that is
selected for the main zone), press the [Rec/Zone 3]
button twice in succession.
Note:
Recording and Zone 3 operations use the same
circuit and therefore cannot be used at the same
time.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
When not using either Rec/Zone 3 or Zone 2, press
that button and then press the [Off] button to turn
off the signal.
If the Rec/Zone 3 or Zone 2 signal is turned on and
the connected component is not turned on, the
electric signal will still be sent through the circuitry
and the excess load may cause deterioration of the
audio signal.

D Display button [56]
Press to display information about the current input
source signal. Each time you press the [Display]
button, the screen changes to show you different
information concerning the input signal.

DSP
[61]
Press these buttons to scroll through the listening
modes and set a new one for the input source you
are currently listening to. For each different input
signal, different listening modes are possible. See
page 58 for a detailed explanation of the different
listening modes.

F Dimmer button (Other than European
models) [54]
Press to set the brightness of the front display. There are
four settings available: normal, dark, very dark, and
volume only.
For European models, this function can be operated
only with the remote controller.

J Memory button [63]
Press to assign the radio station, to which you are
currently tuned, as a preset channel or press to
delete a previously preset station.

K Setup /[ ]/[ ]/Enter/[ ]/[ ]/Exit [90]
These buttons are used with the On Screen Display
(OSD) menu.
Setup: Press to bring up the OSD menu.
Exit: Press to exit the OSD menu when at the Menu
Screen, or move to one screen previous to the one
that is displayed if at any other screen.
and : When selecting items in the OSD menu,
press these buttons to move the on-screen cursor (or
the highlighted portion) upward and downward.
and : When setting parameters in the OSD
menu, press these buttons to select parameter values
or modes.
Enter: Press to display the screen for the selected
item in the OSD menu.
Note for European models:
These buttons are also used to set programs and
finish scans when performing a PTY or TP scan
with the RDS broadcasts.

Getting Started

C Off [71]

L Phones jack [54]
This is a standard stereo jack for connecting stereo
headphones.

F RT/PTY/TP button (European models only) [65]
This button is only available on European models.
Press this button to tune into the Radio Data System
(RDS) for FM broadcasting. RDS was developed
within the European Broadcasting Union (EBU)
and is available in most European countries. Each
time the button is pressed, the display changes from
RT (radio text) to PTY (program type) to TP (traffic
program) and then back to RT again.

Tuning
button [62]
Use these buttons to change the tuner frequency.
The tuner frequency is displayed in the front display
and it can be changed in 50 kHz increments for FM
and 9 kHz increments for AM. When a station is
tuned into, “> <” will appear in the front display
(When the stereo signal is received,
“
” will appear).

Preset
button [63]
When AM or FM is selected as the input source,
press one of these buttons to jump to a radio station
that you preset using the [Memory] button. Pressing
the right button moves from the most recently preset
station to older ones, and pressing the left button
moves in the reverse order.

I Tuning Mode button [62, 63]
This button is used to select the Auto or Manual
Tuning Mode.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
Rear Panel
The design of rear panel varies depending upon region for which the model is intended. For models intended for USA,
Canada, and Australia, refer to “Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards” on page 146.
*
A

C DIGITAL IN

MULTI
- CH

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

REMOTE
CONTROL
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

IN 2

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET

( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

CENTER

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

AC INLET

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

PRE OUT A

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

*This terminal is provided for future service enhancement and is not used currently. Never plug the cable connector for other
terminals into this terminal.

the OPTICAL terminals.

5 MULTI-CH IN 1
K

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

RS 232

6
IR IN
+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND
MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

12 V
TRIGGER OUT
A

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

GND

D
E

TOTAL
100mA MAX.

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

UDD

100mA MAX.

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

USA and
Canadian
models

8
1 ( ) i.LINK S400 (AUDIO) terminals
These connectors are for connecting to an i.LINK
(AUDIO)-ready device using a 4-pin (S400) i.LINK
(AUDIO) cable. The RDC-7.1 complies with the
standards on audio only transmissions.
2 ETHERNET (Net-Tune)
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
This connector is for connecting to an Ethernet network.
3 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN/OUT
The input/output terminals for digital sound signal.
The sound quality equals the signal passed through
the COAXIAL terminals.
4 DIGITAL COAXIAL IN/OUT
The input/output terminals for digital sound signal.
The sound quality equals the signal passed through

(Only available as option for the USA model.)
This connector is for connecting components with a
multichannel output.
DIGITAL IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
The DIGITAL IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU
terminal is for connecting the DVD player and other
devices equipped with the XLR (balanced) type
digital audio output terminal.
AUDIO IN/OUT
These connectors are for connecting to the audio
input and output jacks on audio/video components.
To connect a turntable, connect to the PH jacks.
In addition to the PH jacks, the RDC-7.1 offers nine
input and five output jacks.
VIDEO/S VIDEO IN/OUT
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
These connectors are for connecting to the video
input and output jacks on video components.
Six input and four output jacks are available for
each of VIDEO and S VIDEO connection.
COMPONENT VIDEO IN/OUT
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
These connectors are for connecting to the component
video outputs/inputs of video components that have them.
European and Asian models are equipped with three
inputs and one output for the RCA-type
COMPONENT connection and one input and
output for the BNC-type COMPONENT
connection.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
These jacks are for connecting the FM indoor
antenna and the AM loop antenna that are supplied
with the RDC-7.1.

A HDMI IN/OUT
(Only available as option for the USA model.)
This interface can transfer digital audio and video
signals simultaneously. The terminal can be
connected to the HDMI terminal on components
such as DVD player, set top box (B tuner),
projector, and digital TV.

REMOTE CONTROL
This jack is for connecting other IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo components equipped with the same
terminal. The audio connection cables must also be
connected.

C RS 232
This port is for connecting the RDC-7.1 to home
automation and external controllers.

D 12V TRIGGER OUT
These connectors are used to connect to the 12V
TRIGGER IN terminal of a component. Available

connectors are one with maximum current capacity
of 200 mA and four with 100 mA.

E IR IN (for all models), IR OUT (other than
USA and Canadian models)
These connectors are for connecting the remote
sensor of a multiroom kit (sold separately).
The connectors are provided for main room, Zone 2,
and Zone 3.

F PRE OUT A/B (RCA type)
These jacks are for connecting power amplifiers. If
the jacks on your power amplifier are RCA type
jacks, connect them here. Both of the PRE OUT A
and PRE OUT B sections offer all the terminals for
the front left and right, center, surround, surround
back and subwoofer channels.

Getting Started

0 ANTENNA (FM/AM)

G PRE OUT A (Balanced type)
These jacks are for connecting power amplifiers. If
the jacks on your power amplifier are XLR
(balanced) type jacks, connect them here.

H AC INLET
This connector is for connecting the supplied power
cord.

Front Panel Display

A Listening mode or input format indicators
One of these indicators lights to show the format of
the current input source. In addition, one of the
listening mode indicators lights to indicate the
current listening mode.

B Multifunction display
During normal operation, shows the current input
source. When the FM or AM input is selected,
shows the frequency and preset number. When the
[Display] button is pressed, shows the listening
mode and input source format.
C Audio input signal path indicators
Shows from which terminal the audio input signal is
coming.
D MAIN A/B indicators
Indicates which room is currently in use.

E SLEEP indicator
Lights when the sleep timer is turned on.

F Tuning indicators
AUTO indicator
Lights when receiving FM broadcasts in the stereo
mode. Turns off when placed into the monaural mode.

RDS indicator (European models only)
Lights when an RDS station is being received.
TUNED indicator
Lights when a radio station is being received.
MEMORY indicator
Lights when the [Memory] button is pressed to
preset a radio station.
FM STEREO indicator
Lights when an FM broadcast station is being
received in stereo. Turns off when placed into the
monaural mode.
G Program format display
When the input source is DVD video, Super Audio
CD, or compressed digital audio signal such as
Dolby Digital and DTS, the channels corresponding
to the input source light.
H Volume display
Shows the volume level.
I Video input signal path indicators
Shows from which terminal the video input signal is
coming.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
Remote Controller (Amp Mode)
The RDC-7.1’s remote controller is a multipurpose
device that can be used to control not just the RDC-7.1
but your other AV components as well. This section
explains how its various operating modes can be used to
control the RDC-7.1. When you use the Net-Tune
mode, see page 78 for details. See page 124 for
information on using the remote controller to control
IntegraRESEARCH components connected via
and
TVs, VCRs, and AV components made by other
manufacturers.

Amp mode is used to control the RDC-7.1. To select
Amp mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears
on the display.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor the [Mode] button
is illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously.

1 On button
This button is used to turn on the RDC-7.1.

2 Standby button
This button is used to set the RDC-7.1 to Standby.

3 Number/letter buttons

Scroll wheel

These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters.

4 Custom button
This button is used to access various settings that
you can use to customize the operation of the
remote controller.
On

Standby
TV
Input

5 Macro button
This button is used with the Macro function.

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

T V VOL

Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Sleep

Dimmer
u
M en
Top
r
rve
e
S

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

E xi
t

turn

ide

S etu

This button is used to return to the previously
displayed onscreen setup menu (OSD).

A Display button

Display

9 CH +/– button
0 Return button

VOL

Prev
CH

Enter buttons
These buttons are used to select items on the
onscreen setup menus (OSD). The [ENTER] button
is also used to enter names and to confirm settings.
This button is used to select radio presets.

A
DJ

7 Dimmer button
8 Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &

Custom

TV
Input

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes.
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

6 Mode button

Muting

This button is used to display various information
about the currently selected input source.

B Main A button
Rec

Main A

Main B

Random

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Angle Last Memory
Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Caps

For the speakers used in main room A, every press
of this button toggles the status between enabled
and disabled.

C THX button
This button is used to select the THX listening
modes.

D Surround button
This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS
listening modes.

E Direct button
RC-554M
RC-555M

This button is used to select the Direct listening
mode.

Index Parts and Facilities—Continued
T All CH ST button

This button is used to select the Pure Audio listening mode.

G Test Tone, CH SEL, Level– & Level + buttons
These buttons are used to adjust the level of each
speaker individually. These functions can be set
only with the remote controller. The [Level –] and
[Level +] buttons are also used to adjust the volume
in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

H Audio SEL button
This button is used to select the audio input signal
format (e.g., analog, digital, etc.).

I LIGHT button
This button is used to turn on or off the remote controller’s illuminated buttons.

J Direct Tuning button
This button is used with the number buttons to
select a radio station by entering its frequency. Press
this button first, and then use the number buttons to
enter the frequency.

This button is used to select the All Ch Stereo
listening mode.

U Stereo button
This button is used to select the Stereo listening
mode.

DSP/DSP
buttons
These buttons are used to select the listening modes.

W Re-EQ button
This button is used to turn on and off the Re-EQ
function.

Getting Started

F Pure A button

X L Night button
This button is used to set the Late Night function.

Y Open/Close [ ] button
This button is used to open and close the front door
that covers the lower buttons.

K Display
The top line of this LCD display shows the name of
the currently selected input source. The bottom line
shows the currently selected remote controller
mode.

L Zone 3 button
This button is used when you want to set the volume
and input source for Zone 3.

M Zone 2 button
This button is used when you want to set the volume
and input source for Zone 2.

N Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
the name of the input source appears on the display.

O Sleep button
This button is used to set the Sleep function. This
function can be set only with the remote controller.

P VOL

button
This button is used to set the volume of the
RDC-7.1.

Q Setup button
This button is used to access the onscreen setup
menus (OSD) that appear on the TV.

R Muting button
This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This
function can be set only with the remote controller.

S Main B button
For the speakers used in main room B, every press
of this button toggles the status between enabled
and disabled.

Speaker Placement
Basic Speaker Placements for Home Theater and the Function of Respective
Speakers
The RDC-7.1 has many excellent features to recreate a clear three-dimensional sound image and lively sound movement.
This enables you to enjoy, at home, the rich sound effects of a live theater or concert hall performance.
When playing a DVD, you can enjoy sound effects provided by DTS or Dolby Digital, depending on the recording
format. In addition, you can enjoy THX sound and IntegraRESEARCH’s proprietary DSP surround playback for TV or
digital satellite broadcasts.
Front left and right speakers
Outputs overall sound. They play the most important role in a home theater system, by creating basic sound images and fields.
Center speaker
Complements the sound effects from front left and right speakers
to enrich and clear the sound image and movement. In movies, an
actor’s speech comes mainly from the center speaker.

Surround back speakers
Enhances the sound space
representation with surround channel signals.
Recreating sound movement effects and sound
fields behind the listener
gives a more realistic
experience.

Subwoofer
Outputs only bass sounds to
enhance and complement bass
sound effects.

Surround left and right speakers
Enhances the sensation of being at a live performance by giving three-dimensional
sound movement to the sound effects.

• For optimum surround playback, set the distance between the listener and the speakers so that the time it takes
the sound to reach the listener is same. Also, you need to set each speaker volume level individually in order to
balance the volume level between speakers (See pages 92 to 94).

Speaker Placement—Continued
Placing the Speakers
To fully enjoy surround sound, the configuration and placement of the speakers used are important. Be sure to read
through the descriptions in the previous page and shown below.
This section provides examples and descriptions that assume a typical situation.
Front Left and Right Speakers, and Center Speaker

Installation and Connections

• Place the front left and right speakers symmetrically and so
that the distance from the listening position is the same.
TV or screen
• When placing speakers, direct the speakers toward the
Front
position of the listener’s ears where the listener sits to enjoy Front
Center
Left
Right
music or movies.
• Place the three speakers so that the heights of the three
speakers are aligned. The ideal height for the speakers is the
height of the listener’s ears. When placing the center
speaker above or below the TV, tilt it toward the listener’s
ears.
• Place the center speaker as close to the screen or monitor as
possible and in the center between the left and right front
speakers. When placing the center speaker near the TV, use a shielded speaker.
• If no center speaker is used, place the left and right front speakers closer to each other.
Left and Right Surround Speakers

• Place these speakers on each side of, or angled behind, the
listener.
• Place the surround speakers symmetrically from the listener
position and so that the distance from the listener is equal
between left and right surround speakers.
• When enjoying mainly movies, placing the surround
speakers about 3 feet (1 m) higher than the height of the
listener’s ears, results in more of a surround effect.
• When enjoying mainly music, placing the surround
Surround Back
speakers at the height of the front speakers may provide a
better surround effect.
• When using surround back speakers in addition to the
surround speakers, placing the surround speakers slightly forward from their current position will make the sound
movement smoother.
Surround Back Speakers
• Place the speakers about 3 feet (1 m) or higher than the
height of the listener’s ears.
• When using one surround back speaker, place it behind the
listener.
• When using two surround back speakers, place them
behind the listener so that the angles between the lines from
each surround back speaker to the listener and a line
straight back from the listener are about 30 degrees,
forming an equilateral triangle of the listener and the two
surround back speakers.
*When using a THX-certified speaker system, also refer to
“Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio” on the next
page.

Speaker Placement—Continued
Subwoofer
Using a subwoofer greatly improves the volume level and
sound quality of bass sounds. The subwoofer effect depends
not only on the listening position but also on the shape of the
listening room.
• In general, place the subwoofer in a corner of the room or at
a point 1/3 the width of the room.
• Play a movie or music that contains high quality bass
sounds to determine the subwoofer placement. Change the
subwoofer’s position and check the effect, then select the
position where the bass sounds are best heard.
• You can place two subwoofers for more powerful and
richer heavy bass sounds.

Corner

1/3 room
length

Speaker Placement Suitable for THX Audio
To enjoy sources using THX Cinema or THX Surround EX Layout with dipole speakers
technology, we recommend using a THX speaker system from
1
2
THX Ltd. A speaker system supporting the THX Ultra2
1
2
standard is best suited for THX Ultra2 Cinema or THX Music
3
5
3
4
Mode.
4
5
The layout example on the right represents a case using the
6
dipole speakers. A dipole speaker is a two-way directivity
7
speaker that outputs the same sound in two directions such as
6
7
forward and backward.
8
Most dipole speakers are marked with an arrow indicating how
10
they should be oriented in the room in order to match their
9
phases*. Dipole surround speakers should be placed so that
8
9
their arrows point forward toward the screen, and dipole
10
surround back speakers should be placed so that their arrows
point toward each other.

TV or screen
Subwoofer
Front left speaker
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Surround left speaker
Surround right
speaker
Surround back left
speaker
Surround back right
speaker
Listening position

*Phase: The word represents the waveform position in one cycle (0 to 360 degrees) of a sine wave. If
the phase does not match between multiple waveforms due to the distance between multiple speakers,
the speaker orientation, or the miswiring of positive and negative poles, the sound image or space may
be obscured or the sound may be less easy to listen to.

When playing the source in the THX Ultra2 Cinema or THX Music Mode format using two
surround back speakers supporting the THX Ultra2 standard, place them as close together as
possible. After placing the surround back speakers, perform the settings described in the
“THX Audio Setup” (page 94).

7
10
As close as
possible

Speaker Placement Suitable for a Music Source such as DVD-Audio
This placement is based on the ITU-R* recommendation. In this placement, five
speakers with the same performance capabilities are used for front left and right,
center, and left and right surround speakers, and they are placed so that the distances
between every speaker and the listening position are equal to each other and the
heights of the speaker and the listener’s ears are the same. A mixing studio used for
making multichannel DVD-Audio source material adopts this placement.

Center
Front
Right

Front
Left
60

Subwoofer

*ITU-R: International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector

Speaker Placement—Continued

The following speaker placements will be available
according to the number of speakers connected to the
RDC-7.1. For the number of speaker channel, _.1 ch
represents a subwoofer.

2 ch/2.1 ch
This placement is used with
two speakers (front left and
FR
FL
right speakers). It is
optimum for 2 ch sources
including analog 2 ch, 2 ch
linear PCM, Dolby Digital,
DTS, DTS96/24, and AAC
format sources. When the
number of channels in the
source is 3.1 or greater, the
signals will be distributed
through the left and right channels accordingly.

This placement is suitable for
playing 5.1 ch sources
FR
FL
C
including analog multichannel,
Dolby Digital, DTS, and AAC
format sources. When the
source is 2 ch or mono, the
signal will be decoded with
Dolby Pro Logic II or DTS
NEO:6 format and played as
5.1 ch sources.
When the number of
channels in the source is 6.1 or greater, the surround
back signal will be distributed through the surround left
and right speakers accordingly.
SW

Key to abbreviations:
FL: Front left speaker, FR: Front right speaker, C: Center
speaker, SL: Surround left speaker, SR: Surround right
speaker, SBL: Surround back left speaker, SBR: Surround
back right speaker, SW: Subwoofer

5 ch/5.1 ch

Available Speaker Placements
According to the Number of Speakers

6 ch/6.1 ch/7 ch/7.1 ch (with center speaker)

3 ch/3.1 ch

SW
FL

This placement is used with
three speakers (front left,
front right, and center
speakers). When the number
of channels in the source is
4.1 or greater, the signal for
surround and surround back
channels will be output
through the front left and
right speakers.

SBL

SBR

6 ch/6.1 ch/5 ch/5.1 ch (without center speaker)

4 ch/4.1 ch

SBL

SBR
SW
FR

This placement is suitable for
playing 5.1 or 6.1 ch sources
when the surround back
sound is much more
preferred than the center
sound with less speaker units
than the normal
configuration. The center
channel signal will be output
through the front left and
right speakers.

SW
FL

In this placement, when the
number of channels in the
source is 5.1 or greater, the
center channel signal will be
output through the front left
and right speakers, and the
surround back channels will
be output through the
surround speakers.

This placement is suitable for
playing 6.1 ch sources
including DTS-ES Matrix/
Discrete and Dolby Surround
EX format signals.
When you use two surround
back speakers, the same signal
will be output from them
because the surround back
channel is mono. When the
source is 2 ch or mono, it will
be decoded with the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6
format and played as 6.1/7.1
ch sources.

Installation and Connections

Speaker Placement—Continued
Connection Examples
The RDC-7.1 has two speaker terminal blocks for speaker system [A] and [B]. This allows you to build two 7.1 ch
home theater systems, and various speaker placements and connections are also available. For example, some channels
of either speaker system can be used for another room (Zone 2), or you can select one of two speaker systems for
playback according to the source.
When you use two speaker systems, you have to associate the speakers with the zone (e.g., Main A, Main B, etc.).
After making the association, for example, pressing the “Main A” button on the remote controller will output the
source from the speakers configured as “Main A.”
Here are some examples of speaker placement and zone association. These examples can be your reference when you
build your own home theater system. The illustration on the right represents the actual settings displayed corresponding to
each example. For details on configuring speaker placement and zone association, see page 92.
*In the following illustrations, white speakers denote speaker system [A] and gray ones denote speaker system [B].
*Key to abbreviations:
FL: Front left speaker; FR: Front right speaker; C: Center speaker; SL: Surround left speaker; SR: Surround right speaker;
SBL: Surround back left speaker; SBR: Surround back right speaker; SW: Subwoofer

When you wish to configure 7.1 ch speaker system in the main room A only, the initial setting can be used without
any modification.
Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system; Main room B: 7.1ch speaker system
SW
FL

Main room A
SL

Main room B
SR

SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================
Speaker A
a.Front L/R :Main
b.Center
:Main
c.Surr L/R :Main
d.Surr Back
:Main A 2ch
e.Subwoofer :Main
Speaker B
f.Front L/R :Main
g.Center
:Main
h.Surr L/R :Main
i.Surr Back
:Main B 2ch
j.Subwoofer :Main

A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B

• Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”
• Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main B.”
• Pressing the [Main A] or [Main B] button causes the sound to be output from the speaker system associated
with the zone button. Both speaker systems cannot be selected simultaneously.
*If you set all the zone parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A” and play a single source, the same audio signal will be
output from both speaker systems [A] and [B].

Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker systems and the two additional front speakers
(When you want to use speaker system [A] for movies and enjoy 7.1 surround sound and the two additional front
speakers for classic music.)

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================

Main room A
SL

SBL

SBR

Speaker A
a.Front L/R :Main A
b.Center
:Main A
c.Surr L/R :Main A
d.Surr Back
:Main A 2ch
e.Subwoofer :Main A
Speaker B
f.Front L/R :Main A
g.Center
:Not Used
h.Surr L/R :Not Used
i.Surr Back
:Not Used
j.Subwoofer :Not Used

3-3.Stereo
=====================
a.Re-EQ/Academy
:Off
b.Front Speaker

c.Subwoofer :A

Here is an example of the
stereo listening mode.

• Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”
• Set the front speaker parameters for speaker system [B] to “Main A.”
• If you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the source and set the front
speaker setting parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu.
When you want to output to both speaker systems simultaneously, you can choose the “A+B” setting.
• To output the sound, press the [Main A] button on the remote controller.

Speaker Placement—Continued
Main room A: 7.1 ch speaker system and the two additional front speakers connected through the biamp connection (when you want to use either the 7.1 ch speakers or the additional front speakers
according to the source)

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================

Main room A
SL

SBL

SBR

3-3.Stereo
=====================
a.Re-EQ/Academy
:Off
b.Front Speaker

c.Subwoofer :A

Here is an example of the
stereo listening mode.

Installation and Connections

• Set all the zone parameters for speaker system [A] to “Main A.”
• For speaker system [B], set the front speaker parameters to “Main A” and the surround back speaker parameters to
“Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on connections, see page 27).
• When you want to use the front speakers of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the source and set the
front speaker parameters to “B” in the listening mode setup menu.
*When using the bi-amp connections, the two speaker systems cannot be used to output simultaneously.

Main room A: 5.1 ch speaker system including the front speakers connected through the bi-amp
connections

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================

Main room A

Speaker A
a.Front L/R :Main A
b.Center
:Main A
c.Surr L/R :Main A
d.Surr Back
:Bi-Amp for Front
e.Subwoofer :Main A
Speaker B
f.Front L/R :Not Used
g.Center
:Not Used
h.Surr L/R :Not Used
i.Surr Back
:Not Used
j.Subwoofer :Not Used

• For speaker system [A], set the surround back speaker parameters to “Bi-Amp for Front” and all the other speaker
parameters to “Main A” (For details on speaker connections, see page 27).
• For speaker system [B], set the speaker parameters to “Not Used.”
*When using the bi-amp connections, you cannot use Zone 2 since the surround back channel is used for the front speakers of main
room A.

Speaker Placement—Continued
Main room A: 7.1 ch from speaker system [A] and additional subwoofer and surround speakers from
speaker system [B] (suitable for enjoying more powerful and lively surround sound in main room A);
Main room B: two front speakers from speaker system [B] using the bi-amp connections

Main room A
SL

SBL

SBR

Main room B

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================
Speaker A
a.Front L/R :Main A
b.Center
:Main A
c.Surr L/R :Main A
d.Surr Back
:Main A 2ch
e.Subwoofer :Main A
Speaker B
f.Front L/R :Main B
g.Center
:Not Used
h.Surr L/R :Main A
i.Surr Back
:Bi-Amp for Front
j.Subwoofer :Main A

3-5.Multichannel Input
=====================

b.Re-EQ

:Off

e.Surr L/R Sp

:A+B

g.Subwoofer

:A+B

Here is an example of the
multichannel listening mode.
• For speaker system [A], set all the speaker parameters to “Main A.”
• For speaker system [B], set the surround speaker and subwoofer parameters to “Main A,” the front speaker
parameters to “Main B,” and the surround back speaker parameters to “Bi-Amp for Front” (For details on speaker
connections, see page 27).
• When you want to use the surround speakers and subwoofer of speaker system [B] for specific sources, select the
source and set the parameters for these speakers to “B” or “A+B” in the listening mode setup menu.
When you set the parameter to “B,” the audio signal comes out from the surround speakers and subwoofer of
speaker system [B]. When you set the parameter to “A+B,” the signal comes out from the surround speakers and
subwoofer of both speaker systems [A] and [B].

Connecting a Power Amplifier
Connecting a Power Amplifier Using RCA Type Cables
You can connect the power amplifier that has RCA type input terminals to the RDC-7.1 using RCA type cables. Two
RCA type input terminal sets (A and B) are available for this connection.
The PRE OUT A terminals reflect the mode settings configured for the “Speaker System [A].”
DIGITAL IN

RDC-7.1

( BALANCED )

AES/EBU

OUT

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

L
CENTER

R
SUB
WOOFER

FRONT

SURR

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SURR BACK R

SURR R

PRE OUT A

Subwoofer
FRONT
RIGHT

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

CENTER

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

Installation and Connections

SURROUND
RIGHT

SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

LINE INPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

AC INLET

FUSE

12V TRIGGER
IN

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

OUT

Power amplifier

The PRE OUT B terminals reflect the mode settings configured for the “Speaker System [B].”

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

UPP

RDC-7.1

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
AC INLET

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

L
CENTER

R
FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L

R
SUB
WOOFER SURR

FRONT

( SINGLE)

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

Subwoofer
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

SURROUND
RIGHT

FRONT
RIGHT

CENTER

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

LINE INPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

OUT

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

Power amplifier

Connecting a Power Amplifier—Continued
Check the instruction manual that came with your power
amplifier and verify that the input pin assignments are
compatible with those for the RDC-7.1.
1. Connecting the output terminal
Match the pins and insert the terminal until you hear a
“click.” Ensure that it is secure by gently pulling it.

Connecting a Power Amplifier Using
XLR Type Cables
You can connect the power amplifier that has XLR
(balanced) type input terminals to the RDC-7.1 using
XLR type cables. One XLR type input terminal set is
available for this connection.
The pin assignments for these terminals, which conform
to the AES* standard, are shown below.
*AES: Audio Engineering Society
XLR type

2. Disconnecting the output terminal
Pull out the cable (in the direction indicated by the
arrow) while holding down the connection cable
button.

Balanced cable

Push
1. GND
2. non-inverting (+)
3. inverting (–)
RDC-7.1
S400

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

AUDIO

The i.LINK logo is a
trademarks of Sony
Corporation, registered
in the U.S. and other
countries.

DIGITAL IN
PR

( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

OUT

VIDEO

( ASSIGNABLE)

L
CENTER

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT A

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

FRONT

Subwoofer
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

SURROUND
RIGHT

FRONT
RIGHT

CENTER

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

LINE INPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

Power amplifier

OUT

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

Connecting a Power Amplifier—Continued
Using Bi-amp Connection
When you use bi-wiring-enabled speakers for the front speakers, you can make the bi-amp connection. In this
connection, the front and surround back speaker terminals on the power amplifier will be used for tweeter and woofer,
respectively. This connection allows you to obtain high quality sound as well as maximum treble and bass performance
from the tweeter and woofer, enriching your sound experience.
Caution:
When making the bi-amp connection, make sure to remove the shorting bars connecting the high range
(Tweeter) and low range (Woofer) terminals.
For the settings on the bi-amp connection, see pages 92 and 93.
Power amplifier
SURROUND BACK
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
RIGHT

FRONT
RIGHT

INPUT
SELECT

CENTER

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND
LEFT

FRONT
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

INPUT
SELECT

OUTPUT

Installation and Connections

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
4 OHMS MIN. PER EACH
SPEAKER TERMINAL

FUSE

AC INLET

12V TRIGGER
IN

SURROUND BACK
RIGHT
OUTPUT

OUT

SEVEN CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

MODEL NO. RDA-7.1

FRONT
RIGHT

FRONT
LEFT

SURROUND BACK
LEFT

OUTPUT

High range (Tweeter)

Low range (Woofer)

Right speaker

Left speaker

Bi-wiring-enabled speakers

3.
4.

Connect the (+) tweeter terminal of the right speaker to the FRONT RIGHT (+) terminal on the power amplifier
and the (+) woofer terminal of the right speaker to the SURROUND BACK RIGHT (+) terminal on the power
amplifier.
Connect the (–) tweeter terminal of the right speaker to the FRONT RIGHT (–) terminal on the power amplifier
and the (–) woofer terminal of the right speaker to the SURROUND BACK RIGHT (–) terminal on the power
amplifier.
Connect the (+) tweeter terminal of the left speaker to the FRONT LEFT (+) terminal on the power amplifier and
the (+) woofer terminal of the left speaker to the SURROUND BACK LEFT (+) terminal on the power amplifier.
Connect the (–) tweeter terminal of the left speaker to the FRONT LEFT (–) terminal on the power amplifier and
the (–) woofer terminal of the left speaker to the SURROUND BACK LEFT (–) terminal on the power amplifier.

Connecting Antennas
This feature requires the tuner terminal board [K] to
be inserted in the RDC-7.1.
This chapter explains how to connect the supplied
indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to
connect commercially available outdoor FM and AM
antennas.

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.

FM antenna connector
AM antenna push terminals
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

FM
75
K

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
■ USA and Canadian Models

RS 232

HDMI

Y
SUB

IN 1

Insert the plug fully
into the socket.

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.

■ Other Models

C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET

( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
3

ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES/EBU

PR
3

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

CENTER

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER

AC INLET

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT A

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR SURR BACK
( ASSIGNABLE)

PRE OUT B

FM
75

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

Insert the plug fully
into the socket

Once your RDC-7.1 is ready for use, you’ll need
to tune into an FM radio station and adjust the
position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.

Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.

Thumbtacks,
etc.

Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure
yourself when using thumbtacks.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available
outdoor FM antenna instead.

Connecting Antennas—Continued
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna

The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try using a commercially available
outdoor FM antenna instead.

Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
FM
75

Notes:

Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected in either terminal)
Make sure that the wires are attached securely
and that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.

Installation and Connections

• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but acceptable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an attic
or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well away
from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line of sight to
your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antennas should be located away from possible
noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antennas should be situated well
away from power lines and other high voltage equipment.
• Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with local
regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter

Push

Insert wire

Release

It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and
TV reception, as this can cause interference problems.
If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna
splitter, as shown.

Once your RDC-7.1 is ready for use, you’ll need
to tune into an AM radio station and adjust the
position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception. Keep the antenna as far away
as possible from your RDC-7.1, TV, speaker
cables, and power cords.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using a commercially
available outdoor AM antenna.

TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver

To TV (or VCR)

Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna (aerial)
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna

Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside
horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting it horizontally above a window.
Note that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Outdoor antennas must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electric shock hazards.

Connecting AV Components
Types of Connection Cables and Terminals
In addition to the conventional terminals, the RDC-7.1 has various terminals that are capable of next-generation digital
transmission.
Before connecting AV components to the RDC-7.1, make sure that your cable type matches the terminal shape and the
signal type and that the cable length is appropriate for the placement of your connected components.
Audio cables
Cable names

Cable forms

Terminals shapes

Description

Optical cable

The connection using these cable types transmits digital audio signals. There is no sound
quality difference among these cable types. In
general, the consumer models are equipped
with optical or coaxial terminals and the professional models are equipped with AES/EBU terminals.
Note:
Some optical cables have their own covers.
Before making a connection, remove the covers. When plugging in a cable, be sure to match
the connector shape with the terminal shape.
Each optical terminal on the RDC-7.1 has its
own shutter-type cover. For the RDC-7.1, plug
in the optical cables so that the optical cable
connector pushes the terminal cover down.

Coaxial cable

AES/EBU
Balanced Cable
DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

Audio connection
cable

Multichannel connection cable

This connection transmits an analog audio signal. Plug the red connector (R) into the right
channel terminal and the white connector (L)
into the left channel connector.
MULTI
- CH

IN 1

SUB

SBR

SBL

i.LINK connection
cable (4-pin (S400)
type)

Ethernet cable
(CAT-5 Straight
type)

The terminals for this cable type are for DVD
players that are compatible with the DVD-Audio
format. This connection transmits multichannel
analog audio signals.

This connection can be used for connecting
i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled devices and to transmit
digital audio signals. Also, multichannel analog
audio signals from DVD-Audio or Super Audio
CD format sources will be transmitted digitally.
The RDC-7.1 handles only audio signals
through i.LINK connection.

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

The Ethernet cable is used for connecting multiple PCs or network-ready audio components
that constitute a local area network (LAN).
A LAN is a smaller network composed within a
house or building. The connecting terminals for
the Ethernet cables are often called “LAN port”
or “broadband port.”

*The audio input signal from the ETHERNET (Net-Tune) or MULTI-CH IN terminal will not be output to the HDMI
OUT terminal. Also, the DVD audio or SACD audio input signal from the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal will not be output
to the HDMI OUT terminal.
When you play a source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the following restrictions are applied.
• When you play the audio signal supplied through the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, the audio signal will not be output
to Zone 2 or Zone 3. With this connection, you cannot record the audio signal from the source.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
• The audio input signal from the LAN port will be output only to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source.
• When you play the audio signal from the PH or AUDIO IN terminals in Zone 3, the input source will be output only
to the AUDIO OUT terminals as an analog source. Similarly, in this connection, you can record only the audio signal
as an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.
• When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 2, the source will be downmixed into
2 channel analog audio signal and output to the AUDIO OUT terminals.
• When you play the audio signal from the DIGITAL IN terminals in Zone 3, only the PCM signal will be output as an
analog source to the AUDIO OUT terminals. Similarly, with this connection, you can record only the PCM signal as
an analog source through the AUDIO OUT terminals.
• The audio input signal from the HDMI IN terminal can be output to the HDMI OUT terminal.
• The audio input signal from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 2 will be downmixed into a 2 channel source for
output. You cannot play the source from the MULTI-CH IN terminals in Zone 3 and record it.
Video cables

Component video
connection cable
(BNC type)

S Video connection
cable

Video connection
cable

HDMI connection
cable

Cable forms

Terminals shapes

Description

In this connection, the video signal is decomposed into three color difference signals (Y, Pb/
Cb, and Pr/Cr) and carried through three
cables, which provides better video quality than
the S Video connection.
The terminal shape for the component video
connection cable can be BNC-type or RCAtype.
This connection cannot transmit information for
controlling video devices (e.g., aspect ratio).

Installation and Connections

Cable names
Component video
connection cable
(RCA type)

The video quality is better than with the composite signal. In this connection, the RDC-7.1
cannot transmit the information for controlling
video devices (e.g., aspect ratio).
This connection transmits the standard video
signal and is widely used for various video
devices such as TV and video recorder.

This connection carries video signals digitally.
(Note that no audio signal is carried with this
unit.)

Note:
When you play the source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), connect the TV or monitor to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO
2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.
• Always refer to the instructions that came with the component that you are connecting.
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been properly made.
• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Improper connections can result in noise, poor performance, or
damage to the equipment.
Example: Audio connection cable
Wrong!

Right!

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables. Doing so may adversely
affect the picture and sound quality.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting Monitors such as TV or Projector
For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate
terminal is installed.
• This section describes the connections for displaying the video source or the operating information of the RDC-7.1
on a monitor device such as a TV or projector. Before making a connection, check the terminal types on the monitor
device and acquire the necessary cables by referring to page 31.
• The RDC-7.1 incorporates a video converter, which allows you to enjoy the video source even when the connections
between the playback device and the RDC-7.1 and between the RDC-7.1 and the monitors are different. When your
TV or monitor has various types of input terminals, use the connection with which you can get the best video quality
(For a model with no HDMI terminal, note that the input signal from the COMPONENT terminal will be output
only to the COMPONENT terminal).
• The VIDEO OUT 4 and S VIDEO OUT 4 terminals can be used only for Main room A.
• When you enjoy the video source in the remote zone (Zone 2 or Zone 3), the TV or monitor should be connected to
the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 terminal.
*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.

Make a connection using any of the terminals below.
*1 When connecting to the other S VIDEO OUT terminal, configure the video output
settings accordingly using the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).
*2 When connecting to the other VIDEO OUT terminal, configure the video output
settings accordingly using the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).
*3 European and Asian models only.
Monitor device
such as TV and
projector for
Main room A

VIDEO
IN

S VIDEO
IN

COMPONENT
VIDEO (RCA)

COMPONENT
VIDEO (BNC)

HDMI
IN

*3
PR

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

RS 232

HDMI

Y
IN 1
2

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

REMOTE
CONTROL
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

IN 2

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
1

ZONE 2

OUT

S VIDEO

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

UPP

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

*2
*2

VIDEO
IN

Monitor device such as TV
for Main room B

VIDEO
IN

Monitor device such as TV
for Zone 2

VIDEO
IN

Monitor device such as TV
for Zone 3

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD Player
For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate
terminal is installed.
• When connecting a DVD player to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and
analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.
• When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from a DVD player or operate your
-compatible
IntegraRESEARCH products via
connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the audio output terminals on the DVD player to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).
• This section shows the connection example when you use the default settings of the RDC-7.1. However, you can
connect a DVD player to other terminals within the same terminal section on the RDC-7.1. In such case, remember
to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98) and the video input assignment
in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99).
• For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD player to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to
use the COMPONENT terminal to connect a TV or projector.

Installation and Connections

*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.
*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

DVD player
When connecting to other audio terminals
within the same terminal section, configure
the audio input settings accordingly using the
Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

When connecting to other video terminals
within the same terminal section, configure
the video input settings accordingly using the
Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99).

Audio Output

Video Output
MULTICH OUT
CENTER

AUDIO OUT
FRONT

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

SURR BACK

SURR

OPTICAL

S VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO
OUT

COMPONENT
OUT (RCA)

HDMI
OUT

SUB
WOOFER

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

REMOTE
CONTROL
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

IN 2

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

AC INLET

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD Recorder or Digital VCR (VIDEO 1)
For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate
terminal is installed.
• When connecting a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals
using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.
• This section shows the connections example when you use the VIDEO 1 as an input. In this case, you do not need
additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the RDC- 7.1,
configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98), the video input assignment in the
Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99), the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page
95), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign sub-menu (See page 96).
• You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).
• When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal from the digital device, you have to make analog
audio signal connections. Connect the audio output terminals on the digital device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the
RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables (RCA/phono).
• For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a DVD recorder or digital VCR to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.
*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.
*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.
Example for connecting with the VIDEO 1 as input

Digital video recorder
(DVD recorder, digital VCR)

When connecting to other
audio terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the audio input settings
accordingly using the Audio
Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

C DIGITAL IN

Audio Output
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
COAXIAL

D DIGITAL IN

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

COMPONENT
OUT (RCA)

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

S VIDEO VIDEO
OUT
OUT

OPTICAL

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

When connecting to other video
terminals within the same terminal section, configure the video
input settings accordingly using
the Video Assign sub-menu (See
page 99).

Video Output

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

UPP

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

When connecting to other audio terminals within the same terminal
section, configure the audio output
settings accordingly using the
Audio Output Assign sub-menu
(See page 95).

( ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO IN
DIGITAL
COAXIAL

Audio Input

AUDIO IN
ANALOG

S VIDEO VIDEO
IN
IN

Video Input

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

When connecting to other video
terminals within the same terminal section, configure the video
output settings accordingly using
the Video Output Assign submenu (See page 96).

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR (VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3)
For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate
terminal is installed.
• When connecting a VCR to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.
• This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 2 or VIDEO 3 as an input. In this case, you do
not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the
RDC-7.1, configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98), the video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99), the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign menu
(See page 95), and the video output assignment in the Video Output Assign menu (See page 96).
• You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).
• For a model without a HDMI terminal, when you connect a VCR to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the
COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.
*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.
*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

Installation and Connections

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 2 as input

VCR

Audio Output

When connecting to other
audio terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the audio input settings
accordingly using the Audio
Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

Video Output
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
COAXIAL

S VIDEO VIDEO
OUT
OUT

COMPONENT
VIDEO (RCA)
PB

When connecting to other
video terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the video input settings
accordingly using the Video
Assign sub-menu (See page
99).

For digital
VCR
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

UPP

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

When connecting to other audio terminals
within the same terminal section, configure
the audio output settings accordingly using
the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page
95).

( ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO IN
ANALOG

Audio Input

S VIDEO
IN

Video Input

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

When connecting to other video terminals within the same terminal
section, configure the video output
settings accordingly using the Video
Output Assign sub-menu (See page
96).

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Example for connecting with the VIDEO 3 as input

VCR
When connecting to other
audio terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the audio input settings
accordingly using the Audio
Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

Audio Output
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
OPTICAL

S VIDEO VIDEO
OUT
OUT

COMPONENT
OUT (BNC)
PB

For digital
VCR
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

When connecting to other
video terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the video input settings accordingly using the
Video Assign sub-menu
(See page 99).

Video Output

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

When connecting to other audio terminals within the same terminal section,
configure the audio output settings
accordingly using the Audio Output
Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

( ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO IN
ANALOG

Audio Input

S VIDEO
IN

Video Input

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

When connecting to other video terminals within the same terminal section, configure the video output
settings accordingly using the Video
Output Assign sub-menu (See page
96).

*European and Asian models use the BNC type component terminals, and other models use the RCA type.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a DBS Tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS Tuner
For USA and Canadian models, this type of connection is only possible if an option board that has an appropriate
terminal is installed.
• When connecting a DBS tuner, DBS TV, or BS/CS tuner to the RDC-7.1, make connections for video and audio signals using digital and analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections.
• This section shows the connection example when you use the VIDEO 4 or VIDEO 5 as an input. In this case, you do
not need additional configurations. When connecting to other terminals within the same terminal section on the
RDC-7.1, remember to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98) and the
video input assignment in the Video Assign sub-menu (See page 99). When you use the S VIDEO terminal for connection, you should configure the Video Assign sub-menu.
• You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).
• For a model without a slot for the HDMI terminal, when you connect a BS/CS tuner or LD player to the COMPONENT terminals, be sure to use the COMPONENT terminals to connect a TV or projector.
*For more information on the HDMI interface, see page 43.
*For more information on the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface, see page 40.

When connecting to other audio terminals within the same terminal section,
configure the audio input settings
accordingly using the Audio Assign
sub-menu (See page 98).

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

When connecting to other video terminals within the same terminal section,
configure the video input settings
accordingly using the Video Assign
sub-menu (See page 99).

VIDEO
OUT

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

Installation and Connections

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 4 as input

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO OUT

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL
COAXIAL

When connecting to other
audio terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the audio input settings
accordingly using the Audio
Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

VIDEO
OUT

When connecting to other
video terminals within the
same terminal section, configure the video input settings accordingly using the
Video Assign sub-menu
(See page 99).

Example for connecting with the VIDEO 5 as input

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player, Turntable or Tuner
• When connecting a CD player to the RDC-7.1, make connections using digital or analog terminals. Before making
connections, refer to pages 30, 31 for correct connections. This section shows the connection example when you use
the default audio input assignment settings. However, when you use coaxial cables for digital audio signals, connect
the CD player to any terminal between the AUDIO IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 1 and 6, and remember to configure the
audio input assignment settings in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).
• When connecting a turntable, use the PH terminal. The PH terminal on the RDC-7.1 is designed for turntables that
use a moving magnet (MM) cartridge. When you want to use a turntable with a moving coil (MC) cartridge, connect
the turntable through a step-up transformer or head amplifier.
• If you assign other terminals to the PHONO input source, you need to configure the audio input assignment settings
in the Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).
• When a turntable is equipped with a ground wire, connect the wire to the GND terminal on the RDC-7.1. However,
some turntables may produce noise when the ground wire is connected to the RDC-7.1. In such a case, you do not
have to connect the ground wire.
• When you want to perform analog recording of the audio signal or operate your
-compatible IntegraRESEARCH
products via
connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the
audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables
(RCA/phono).
Turntable

CD Player
AUDIO OUT

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL
OPTICAL

ANALOG

When connecting to other audio terminals
within the same terminal section, configure
the audio input settings accordingly using the
Audio Assign sub-menu (See page 98).

GND

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

IN 1

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

SUB

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

3
SBR

R
1

PB
PR
OUT 1

SBL

FM
75

IN 3

Y
OUT

HD
is
or
tra
Lic

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connecting a Recording Device such as MD Recorder, DAT Deck, CD Recorder
or Cassette Deck

Installation and Connections

• When connecting a MD recorder, DAT deck or CD recorder to the RDC-7.1, make connections using digital or analog terminals. Before making connections, refer to page 30 for correct connections.
• Connect a cassette or DAT tape deck to TAPE1, and an MD or CD recorder to TAPE 2.
• When you connect a cassette deck to the RDC-7.1, be sure to use only analog audio terminals. In the initial settings,
no terminal of this unit is assigned to a REC terminal of the cassette deck. To achieve the assignment, connect the
REC terminal of the cassette deck to any of the AUDIO OUT 1 to 5 terminals and set the terminal to “Tape 1 Rec
Out” in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95). In addition, you can switch the input source “TAPE2” to
MD or CDR. Press the [Tape 2] button on the front panel to display “TAPE 2,” then press the [Tape 2] button again
and hold it for 3 seconds. This changes the display to “MD.” If you wish to change it to “CDR,” release the button
once, and press and hold it again for 3 seconds. This operation enables you to operate Onkyo MD or CD recorders
with the remote controller of this unit (Please note that the
connection is required).
• When connecting to other terminals, remember to configure the audio input assignment in the Audio Assign submenu (See page 98) and the audio output assignment in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95).
• You can change the display name for the input source to represent the actual connected device (See page 101).
• When you want to perform analog recording of an audio signal or operate your
-compatible IntegraRESEARCH
products via
connections with the RDC-7.1, you have to make analog audio signal connections. Connect the
audio output terminals on the source device to the AUDIO IN terminals on the RDC-7.1 using analog audio cables
(RCA/phono).
Example for connecting with the TAPE 1 as input

Cassette deck or DAT deck

When connecting to other digital audio
terminals or to other analog audio output terminals, configure the audio output settings accordingly using the Audio
Output Assign sub-menu (See page 95).

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL
OPTICAL

ANALOG

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

When connecting to other audio
terminals within the same terminal
section, configure the audio input
settings accordingly using the
Audio Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

RS 232

HDMI

SUB

IN 1
5

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
R

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

ZONE 3
OUT

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

When connecting to other digital audio
terminals or to other analog audio output terminals, configure the audio output settings accordingly using the
Audio Output Assign sub-menu (See

( ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL
OPTICAL

DIGITAL
COAXIAL

AUDIO OUT
ANALOG

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

When connecting to other audio
terminals within the same terminal
section, configure the audio input
settings accordingly using the
Audio Assign sub-menu (See page
98).

MD recorder or CD recorder

Example for connecting to the TAPE 2 as input

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connection Using the i.LINK (AUDIO) Terminal (

) (Other than Chinese model)

What is i.LINK
i.LINK is an appellation of IEEE1394, which is the digital interface standard defined by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
Connecting i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported devices allows high speed transfer of data such as digital sound between the
linked devices, and their control.
What is i.LINK (AUDIO)
The RDC-7.1 supports “i.LINK (AUDIO)” of the i.LINK transfer format. Accordingly, “i.LINK (AUDIO)” must also
be supported for other devices that you want to connect to the RDC-7.1. The RDC-7.1 does not support other i.LINK
transfer formats such as “MPEG-2 TS” used for BS digital broadcasts or “DV” used for DVD recorders, digital video,
etc. The RDC-7.1 connected to other i.LINK(AUDIO)-supported devices via i.LINK cable enables you to transfer
multichannel digital sound such as DVD-Audio and SACD (video signal is not supported).
Even when multiple devices are connected to each other, you can perform data transfer and control of target devices via
another device.
The IEEE interfaces on the RDC-7.1 are designed conforming to the standards below.
1. IEEE Std 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus
2. IEC60958 bitstream, DVD-Audio, and SACD in the AM824 Sequence adaptation layers of Audio and Music Data
Transmission Protocol 2.0
Copyright Protection System
The RDC-7.1 supports the DTCP (Digital Transmission Contents Protection) system. The DTCP system uses technologies for data encryption and authentication during the data transfer between the i.LINK-connected digital devices in
order to protect the copyright of the content against illegal duplication. To enjoy replaying DVD-Audio, etc., the DTCP
must also be supported by other devices connected to the RDC-7.1.
How to Make a Connection through the i.LINK (AUDIO) Interface
Use the S400 4-pin i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal on the RDC-7.1 to the i.LINK (AUDIO)
terminal on the i.LINK (AUDIO)-enabled device.
• When using the i.LINK connection, you need to configure the audio input assignment settings in the “i.LINK” section of the Audio Assign sub-menu (Some i.LINK-connected devices may require audio output settings).
• The RDC-7.1 supports only audio signal transmission through the i.LINK (AUDIO) interface. When connecting
video devices, you need to make a connection using other terminals for video signal.
Note:
If any other IntegraRESEARCH product is connected to the
RDC-7.1 via i.LINK, system operation can be achieved via i.LINK
cable. In that case, disconnect the
connection as it may introduce errors.

VIDEO OUT

In addition to the i.LINK
audio connection,
make sure to connect
the terminals for
images such as VIDEO
and/or S VIDEO
terminals.
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

MULTI
- CH

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

IN 1

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

SUB

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

R
1

3
SBR

OUT 1

SBL

FM
75

IN 3

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

PB
1

DIGITAL IN

HDMI
is a tr
or reg
trade
Licen

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Interconnection of i.LINK (AUDIO)-supported Devices
The i.LINK connection allows for data transfer, even if the RDC-7.1 is connected to other devices via another i.LINK
(AUDIO)-supported device. You can connect up to 17 devices in a daisy chain (in-line) connection arrangement using
the i.LINK connection.
Example: RDC-7.1

i.LINK-ready DVD player

i.LINK-ready BS tuner
... up to 17 devices

For devices in a branched connection arrangement, you can connect up to 63, as long as they have three or more
i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals.
Example: RDC-7.1
i.LINK-ready BS tuner

Installation and Connections

i.LINK-ready DVD player

... up to 63 devices
i.LINK-ready MD recorder

Be sure to avoid the looped connection arrangement of devices as shown below. The output signals should not be
returned to the original signal output device, which may cause device failure.
i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready
device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready
device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready
i.LINK (AUDIO)- device
ready device

i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready
device

Note:
• Do not connect any devices that do not support i.LINK (AUDIO), such as “MPEG-2 TS” ready devices used for BS
digital broadcasts and “DV” ready devices used for digital video, etc.
• Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cable to or from other devices, connect additional devices, or turn them on/off
while any i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device is playing. Otherwise, the audio sound may be interrupted.
• Some i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices cannot transfer data when the power mode is set to standby or off. Refer to
the individual User Manual of the i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device you want to connect.
• i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices have their own maximum data transfer rate: either S100 (100 Mbps*), S200 (200
Mbps*) or S400 (400 Mbps*). The rate label is located near the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminals. The RDC-7.1 has a
maximum data transfer rate of 400 Mbps. However, this may decrease depending on the specifications or the maximum data transfer rate of devices connected to the RDC-7.1. It is recommended to connect devices with the same
maximum data transfer rate.
*“Mbps” stands for “mega bits per second” which indicates the maximum data size transferred per second. For example, 400 Mbps
indicates that 400 mega bits of data can be transferred every second.

• The i.LINK feature does not assure successful connectivity between all i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready devices. Successful
data transfer and control signal communications depend on the individual features of each device.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
How to Configure i.LINK Connections
Selecting a Device
When the i.LINK connection is ready, you can use the setup menu to select any device which is connected via i.LINK.
Once you have configured the i.LINK setting, the next time you select the input source, it will be selected as the playing source.
Using Remote Control
1. Press the [Input] button, and then turn the scroll wheel to select any source for setting.
2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [Setup] button.
3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.
4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the [Enter] button.
5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “g. i.LINK.”
6. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select any device.
If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.”
Using Control Buttons on the RDC-7.1
1. Select any input source, and then press the [Setup] button.
2. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.
3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign,” and then press the [Enter] button.
4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “g. i.LINK,” and then press the [Enter] button.
5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select any device.
If you do not want to hear audio sound regardless if the i.LINK connection is ready, select “No.”
Using Useful Functions While the i.LINK Connection is Ready
If any other IntegraRESEARCH product is connected to the RDC-7.1 via i.LINK and assigned as a input source
(Audio Assign), you can use the following functions. The
connection must be disconnected to use them.
i.LINK Selector Change
When the i.LINK-connected device starts playing, the input source will automatically be changed to the one assigned
to the device even if another input source has been selected. See page 121 for detailed operations.
Note:
You cannot hear audio sound of i.LINK-connected devices in Zone 2.
Control of DVD Player
You can control a DVD player by emitting signals from the remote controller to the RDC-7.1.
Auto Start (Wakeup Setup)
While the RDC-7.1 is in standby mode, you can configure the setting of any i.LINK-connected device. See page 121
for detailed operations.
OSD for DVD
If DVD player is connected to the RDC-7.1 via i.LINK, you can output the OSD of the RDC-7.1 on a TV, even if a
DVD player is directly connected to the TV. You can configure the setting to specify the display area on the TV, for
example, right or left side of the screen. When multiple devices are connected, you can select any specific device
through which the output is sent. This function is also available in Zone 2. See page 121 for detailed operations.
Note:
While the OSD for DVD is used, do not change mode to standby, nor turn on/off the player.
System Control Setup
You can select on/off of the i.LINK (AUDIO) output of a DVD player from the RDC-7.1. See page 121 for detailed
operations.
Notes on “DTCP ERROR XXXX” Message
“DTCP ERROR XXXX” message (where “XXXX” is a device name) indicates that the connected device does not
support DTCP (Digital Transmission Contents Protection). In this case follow the procedure described below.
1. From the Setup Menu, select “6. i.LINK Setup” → “6-1. Wakeup Setup” to set “a. Wakeup on i.LINK (IEEE1394)”
to “Disable.”
2. Disconnect the device from the main unit by removing the i.LINK cable from the rear panel.
3. Press the [Standby/On] button so that the main unit enters the Standby mode.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connection Using HDMI Terminals
This feature requires the HDMI terminal board [L] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.
About the HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
The High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) is an interface standard for next-generation TV, designed to connect
between STB (Set Top Box) and display digitally in the home, responding to technological changes such as digitalization of TV broadcasting.
In addition to the existing features provided by the Digital Visual Interface (DVI)*1 standard, HDMI allows transmission
of both audio and control signals. Moreover, multiple cables are required for video, audio, and control signals in conventional connections, but the HDMI interface allows you to make a connection through a single HDMI cable, thus
enabling transfer of digital video and sound data between HDMI-supported devices.
In principle, the HDMI video stream (video signals) is compatible with the DVI. You can use the HDMI-DVI conversion
cables to connect with TVs or monitors that are outfitted with DVI terminals, though video images may not be visible
depending on the combination of devices. The RDC-7.1 uses HDCP; you can enjoy pictures on HDCP ready monitors.
The HDMI interfaces on the RDC-7.1 are designed to conform to the standards below.
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.0

Installation and Connections

Copyright Protection System
The RDC-7.1 supports High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection (HDCP)*2, technology to protect copyright of digital video signals against illegal duplication. HDCP must also be supported on the devices connected to the RDC-7.1.
Use the HDMI cable supplied with the product or those from the marketplace to connect the HDMI OUT terminal on
the RDC-7.1 with the HDMI input terminals on TVs or monitors.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection): The video data encryption technology for DVI developed by
Intel. This technology is designed to protect the video content and a HDCP-compliant DVI receiver is required to
play the encrypted video content.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): The standardization group for digital interface for display, operated
mainly by Intel, Silicon Image, FUJITSU, and Hewlett-Packard (Compaq Computer).
How to Make a Connection through the HDMI Interface
Use the HDMI cable to connect the HDMI terminals on the RDC-7.1 and a HDMI-enabled device such as a DVD player,
TV, or projector.
Set HDMI to 1 or 2 in the Video Assign sub-menu according to the connected device you wish to use. In the initial
settings, 1 is assigned to DVD, and 2 to Video 1.
Basically, the HDMI can transmit audio signals. However in order to playback the audio signal with the RDC-7.1, make
a separate digital connection with a DVD player or other devices, since the RDC-7.1 cannot playback any audio signals
supplied from its HDMI IN 1/2 terminals.
• When other input source than 1 or 2 is selected, analog/digital audio signals and analog video signals will be converted into the HDMI format and output through the HDMI OUT terminal (In the initial settings, no audio signal is
output. Appropriate setting should be made in the Audio Output Assign sub-menu).
• Analog audio signals will be output in the PCM format. Digital audio signals will be output through the HDMI OUT
terminal only if the connected TV or projector can playback the digital audio signals.
A TV or projector that supports PCM audio signals only, for example, cannot playback audio signals in the Dolby
Digital format supplied as an input source to the RDC-7.1. In order to properly playback the audio signals in this
case, the player should be configured to output the PCM signals.
When an analog audio connection is made on the RDC-7.1, analog audio signal is output in the PCM format.

Connecting AV Components—Continued
Connection example when the source selection is performed on the RDC-7.1
DVD Player with HDMI OUTPUT

ONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

RS 232

HDMI

TV or Projector

IN 1

HDMI
OUT

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT

FM
75

A
200mA MAX.

IN 2

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

Set Top Box with HDMI OUTPUT

PB
ZONE 2

UPP

PR
ZONE 3
OUT

HDMI
IN

OUT

IR
( SINGLE )

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

HDMI
OUT

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

RDC-7.1

Tips:
To enable HDMI audio output of the
RDC-7.1 from the TV speakers,
enable HDMI Out according to
“HDMI Out” on page 96.

Connection example for higher video quality
When connecting an AV component equipped with the HDMI input terminal, you can use the connecting layout shown below.
Before making a connection, read the instruction manual of the connected device thoroughly.
K

VIDEO

ANTENNA

DVD Player with HDMI
INPUT and OUTPUT

RS 232

HDMI

Y
IN 1

REMOTE
CONTROL

TV or Projector

12V
TRIGGER
OUT

FM
75

A
200mA MAX.

IN 2

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
ZONE 2

UPP

PR
ZONE 3
OUT

HDMI
IN

OUT

IR
( SINGLE )

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

RDC-7.1

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

HDMI
OUT

Before making a connection, read the
DVD instruction manual thoroughly.

Notes:
• Any input video signal that is not supplied through the HDMI IN terminal (analog video input) will be present on
the HDMI OUT terminal with its original resolution. Therefore, it will not be displayed on the monitor that is not
compatible with the resolution. In this case, adjust the resolution of the input video signal on the source video
device.
• The RDC-7.1 is designed to suppress the audio signal whose audio format is not supported with the monitor. However, when a supported digital audio signal is supplied, the monitor may produce unwanted noisy sound at the time
the sampling frequency or signal format is switched. In this case, disable the audio output and enable the sound from
the speakers built in the monitor.

-compatible AV Components

The
terminal on the RDC-7.1 is for connecting other
IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo components equipped with
the same
terminal. When a component is connected
to the
terminal, it can be operated by the remote
controller supplied with the RDC-7.1. In addition, when
you connect a component to the
terminal, you can
also perform the system operations given below.
Power on/ready function
When the RDC-7.1 is in the standby state, if an
connected component is turned on, the RDC-7.1 also
turns on and the input source selected at the RDC-7.1
automatically switches to that component.
Direct change function
When the play button is pressed on an
-connected
component, the input source selected at the RDC-7.1
automatically changes to that component.
Power off function
When the RDC-7.1 is placed in the standby state, all
-connected components are also automatically put
into the standby state.
Also, if you press the [On] button on the RDC-7.1
remote controller while the RDC-7.1 is turned on, all
-connected components (DVD players, CD players,
MD recorders, tuners, etc.) are also turned on.
IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo
DVD player

Connections for Remote Control (

)

To connect components using the
terminal, simply
connect a remote control cable from this
terminal to
the
terminal of the other component. An
remote
control cable with a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) miniature twoconductor plug comes with every cassette tape deck,
compact disc player, MD recorder, and DVD player that
has an
terminal.
• When performing operations with
-connected
components using the
system, do not use the
remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3).
• For remote control operation, the audio connection
cables must also be connected.
• If a component has two
terminals, you can use
either one to connect to the RDC-7.1. The other one
can be used to daisy chain with another component.
• With IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD players, you
can enter the pre-program code so that you can operate
the DVD player directly with the remote controller
without connecting the
terminals (See page 129).

Installation and Connections

Connecting

RDC-7.1
REMOTE
CONTROL

REMOTE
CONTROL

connector

L
R

Ex: Onkyo CD player

ANALOG
OUTPUT

Remote
control
cable

connector
Ex: Onkyo cassette
tape deck

AUDIO IN
REMOTE
CONTROL

Remote control cable

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

Y
SUB

IN 1

GND

SBR

SBL

PB
HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

PR
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
3

ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES/EBU

PR
3

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

UPP

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
CK

BLE)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT A

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

Connecting Components not Reached by the Remote
Controller Signals (IR IN) – USA and Canadian models –
In order to use the remote controller to control the
RDC-7.1 from a remote location, you will need to prepare a multiroom kit (sold separately) such as one
listed below:
• Multiroom kits such as those made by Niles® and
Xantech®
RF Receivers can also be used with the remote controller
to control the RDC-7.1 from a remote location. To use
RF Receivers, set the Transmission Signal Format setting to “RF” (See page 141 for details).

If Remote Controller Signal Does not
Reach the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor
Effective Sensor Layout
Example for the main room

If the RDC-7.1 is located inside a cabinet or other enclosure
where the infrared rays from the remote controller cannot
enter, then operation with the remote controller will not be
possible. In such a case, it will be necessary to install a
remote sensor at a location outside of the cabinet so that the
infrared rays from the controller can be sensed.
Connecting
block

IR IN

Effective Sensor Connections
When connecting a multiroom kit, use the IR connection
Phoenix (Pluggable connector) terminal (smaller one)
supplied with the RDC-7.1.
Connect the ribbon cable from the connecting block to
the IR connection Phoenix terminal.
1. Loosen the screws using a flatblade screwdriver to
open the shutters.
2. Connect the white wire to the MAIN, ZONE 2 or
ZONE 3 terminal according to the room where the
multiroom kit is used, and then close the shutter.
3. Connect the red wire to the +12V terminal, and then
close the shutter. If you use more than one multi
room kit in different rooms such as MAIN and
ZONE 2, connect all the red wires to the +12V terminal together.
4. Connect the black wire to the GND terminal, and
then close the shutter. If you use more than one
multi-room kit in different rooms, connect all the
black wires to the GND terminal together.
Ribbon cable
Red
Black
White

IR Receiver

Flatblade
screwdriver

+12V
GND
IN

RDC-7.1
Remote controller

In the
cabinet

Main room
: Signal flow

Example for the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3)

The IR IN input allows you to control the RDC-7.1 from
the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3) with the remote
controller even though the remote zone may be on the
other side of the building from the main zone. The
diagram below shows how to make the proper
connections for the remote zone.
To IR IN
IR Receiver
RDC-7.1

When the multiroom kits are used for all the rooms
From Main room

Red

ZONE 2

White
Red

ZONE 3

White
Red

+12V
GND
MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

White

5. As shown in the illustration below, connect the Phoenix terminal firmly to the IR IN socket on the
RDC-7.1.

Connecting
block

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

ANTENNA

COMPONENT VIDEO

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

HDMI

IN 4

PH
SUB

RS 232

Y
IN 1

GND

SR
“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

L
PR

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

PR
S400

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

IR IN
+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND

IN 2

MAIN
ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

Y
AM

AUDIO

The i.LINK logo is a
trademarks of Sony
Corporation, registered
in the U.S. and other
countries.

SUB

12 V
TRIGGER OUT

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

GND
SBL

PR
5

OUT

E
TOTAL
100mA MAX.

OUT

S VIDEO

MULTI
- CH

100mA MAX.

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

UDD

SBR

S VIDEO

IN 2

Remote controller

( ASSIGNABLE)

Main room

Zone 2/Zone 3 room
: Signal flow

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
SUB
WOOFER

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

L
( SINGLE )

CENTER

R
FRONT

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT A

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR SURR BACK
( ASSIGNABLE)

PRE OUT B

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

Push the connector into the socket
until it clicks.

Using an External Device with 12V Trigger Terminal
– USA and Canadian models –
You can turn on the AV devices connected to the
RDC-7.1 automatically using the output signal from the
12V TRIGGER OUT terminal on the RDC-7.1.

5. Connect the Phoenix terminal firmly to the 12V
TRIGGER OUT socket on the RDC-7.1.
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

PH
SUB

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

ANTENNA

COMPONENT VIDEO

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

HDMI

IN 4

RS 232

Y
E

IN 1

GND

SR
“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

IR IN
+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND

IN 2

MAIN
ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

Y
AM

SUB

AUDIO

The i.LINK logo is a
trademarks of Sony
Corporation, registered
in the U.S. and other
countries.

12 V
TRIGGER OUT

SBR

SBL

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

GND

OUT

TOTAL
100mA MAX.

OUT

S VIDEO

MULTI
- CH

100mA MAX.

OUT

VIDEO

UDD

Making a Connection

S400

VIDEO

S VIDEO

IN 2
( ASSIGNABLE)

L
CENTER

R
SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

AC INLET

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

L
( SINGLE )

CENTER

SUB
WOOFER

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L

R
SUB
WOOFER SURR SURR BACK
( ASSIGNABLE)

FRONT

( SINGLE)

PRE OUT A

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

PRE OUT B

Push the connector
into the socket until
it clicks.

6. After making connections, you have to configure the
association between the room where the device is
used and the device to be turned on. For performing
this setting, refer to “12V Trigger Assign” of “Input
Setup” section on page 102.
When connecting the IntegraRESEARCH’s RDA-7.1
power amplifier:
Connect the amplifier to the 12V TRIGGER OUT A
200mA MAX terminal.
When using the mini-jack 12V TRIGGER OUT E
terminal:
When you want to connect two devices to both the Phoenix terminal E and mini-jack terminal simultaneously,
you can connect them as long as the total current value of
their 12V TRIGGER terminals will not exceed 100 mA.
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

PH
SUB

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

HDMI

RS 232

Y
IN 1

GND

1
SBR

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

IR IN
+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND

IN 2

MAIN
ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

Y
AM

SUB

AUDIO

SBL

OUT

S VIDEO

MULTI
- CH

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

IN 2
( ASSIGNABLE)

( ASSIGNABLE)

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

100mA MAX.

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

SURR BACK R

SURR R

100mA MAX.

GND
D

FRONT R

PRE OUT A

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

100mA MAX.

E
TOTAL
100mA MAX.

OUT

( SINGLE )

AC INLET

L
CENTER

R
SUBWOOFER

RS 232

R
SURR

200mA MAX.

( SINGLE )

CENTER

SUB
WOOFER

12 V
TRIGGER OUT

SBR

OUT

R
FRONT

A
B
C
GND
D
E

ANTENNA

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 4

SR
“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

S400

The i.LINK logo is a
trademarks of Sony
Corporation, registered
in the U.S. and other
countries.

Wire

Installation and Connections

When using the 12V TRIGGER Phoenix (Pluggable
Connector) terminal:
1. Loosen the screws using a flatblade screwdriver to
open the shutters.
2. Connect the GND wire (black) to the GND terminal,
and close the shutter.
3. Connect the remaining wire to any of the terminals
between A and E, and close the shutter.

R
FRONT

UDD

You can connect up to five devices to the 12V TRIGGER
Phoenix (Pluggable Connector) terminal (larger one)
and one device to the 12V TRIGGER OUT E terminal
(mini-jack).
You can connect any external devices to the RDC-7.1
whether the connected device is located in the main,
Zone 2 or Zone 3 room.
There are five terminals for connecting external
devices and their maximum current allowed to be
connected are as follows:
A: Up to 200 mA.
B, C and D: Up to 100 mA each.
E: Up to 100 mA for the total current value of both the
Phoenix and mini-jack terminals.
Before connecting an external device, check that the current value for the 12V TRIGGER terminal of the connected device does not exceed the target terminal’s
maximum current above.

FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR SURR BACK
( ASSIGNABLE)

PRE OUT B

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

IR IN

Flatblade
screwdriver

+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND
MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3

12V TRIGGER
IN

12 V
TRIGGER OUT

Device

4. When you connect more than one external device,
you can connect all the GND wires to the GND terminal together.

A
B
C
GND
D
E

200mA MAX
100mA MAX
100mA MAX
100mA MAX
TOTAL 100mA MAX

Connecting Components not Reached by the
Remote Controller Signals (IR IN/OUT)
– Other than USA and Canadian models –
In order to use the remote controller to control the
RDC-7.1 from a remote location, you will need to prepare a multiroom kit (sold separately) such as one
listed below:
• Multiroom kits such as those made by Niles® and
Xantech®
RF Receivers can also be used with the remote controller
to control the RDC-7.1 from a remote location. To use
RF Receivers, set the Transmission Signal Format setting to “RF” (See page 141 for details).

If Remote Controller Signal Does not
Reach the RDC-7.1 Remote Sensor

Example for the remote zone (Zone 2/Zone 3)

Effective Sensor Layout

Remote controller

Example for the main room

IR IN

IR Receiver

RDC-7.1
Remote controller

In the
cabinet

Main room

Zone 2/Zone 3 room
: Signal flow

Making Sensor Connections
When you place the IR receiver in the main room,
connect the cable from the connecting block to the IR IN
MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the
remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting
block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly.
Make the connection as shown below. Do not plug any
equipment into the power outlet until all the connections
are complete.
from connecting block
RDC-7.1

Mini plug cable

: Signal flow

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OUT

Using an External
Device with 12V Trigger
Terminal – Other than USA and

Effective Sensor Layout
In this situation, you will need to use a commercially
available IR emitter. Connect the mini plug of the IR
emitter to the IR OUT terminal on the RDC-7.1 and
then place the IR emitter on the remote sensor of the
component or facing it. When the IR emitter is connected, only the signal input to the IR IN terminal is
output to the IR OUT terminal. The signal input from
the remote sensor on the front of the RDC-7.1 will not
be output to the IR OUT terminal.

IR Receiver

Connecting
block

IR IN

Canadian models –
You can automatically turn on the connected AV components with the output signal from the RDC-7.1’s 12V
TRIGGER OUT terminal.
Making a Connection
Connect the 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal on the
RDC-7.1 to the 12V TRIGGER IN terminal on other
components. Every 12V TRIGGER OUT terminal can
be connected to the components whether they are
placed in the main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.
The RDC-7.1 has five 12V TRIGGER OUT terminals
and the maximum currents to be connected are as follows:
A: 200 mA
B, C, D and E: 100 mA

Installation and Connections

If Remote Controller Signal Does not
Reach Other Components

After making connections, configure the association
between the room (zone) and the component to be
turned on (Refer to “12V Trigger Assign” under “Input
Setup” on page 102).

RDC-7.1
IR OUT
IR Emitter

Remote controller
Other
component

: Signal flow

Device A

Making Sensor Connections

12V TRIGGER
IN
200mA MAX.

When you place the IR receiver in the main room, connect the cable from the connecting block to the IR OUT
MAIN terminal. When you place the IR receiver in the
remote zone, connect the cable from the connecting
block to the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 terminal accordingly.

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A

Device B

200mA MAX.

12V TRIGGER
IN

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

D 100mA MAX.

Other component

E
100mA MAX.

: Signal flow

Remote control
sensor

Mini plug

Emitter

Device C

12V TRIGGER
IN
100mA MAX.

IR Emitter

MAIN

ZONE 2

Device D
ZONE 3

12V TRIGGER
IN
100mA MAX.

OUT

RDC-7.1

Device E

12V TRIGGER
IN
100mA MAX.

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons
The remote controller supplied with the RDC-7.1 is a multifunctional remote controller, so you can operate not only the
RDC-7.1 but also AV components connected to the apparatus and components placed in another room. The basic
operations are explained here. It is recommended that you read and understand this page before starting actual
operations. This explanation focuses on remote controller operations.

To Operate the RDC-7.1 (AMP Mode)

1
On

On,
Standby

Indication on the lower
line changes to AMP.

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

When the remote controller is in AMP
mode, the following functions are
available:
On/Standby: Press to set power on/standby.
Main A: Used when driving the speaker that has
been set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
Main B: Used when driving the speaker that has
been set to “Main B” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
Dimmer: Used when changing brightness of the
display window.
Setup/Return/Enter/Cursor / / / ): Used
when operating the setup menu.
Display: Used when switching the display.
THX/Surround/Pure A/Direct/All CH ST/
Stereo/DSP / : Used when switching the
listening mode.
Test Tone/CH SEL/Level–/+: Used for the test
tone, or when temporarily changing the sound
volume level.
Audio SEL: Used when switching the sound
signal.
Sleep: Used when setting the sleep timer.
VOL
: Used when adjusting the sound
volume.
Muting: Used to temporarily turn off the sound
immediately.
L Night: Used when switching the dynamic range.
Re-EQ: Used when applying the Re-EQ effect.

Press the [Input] button.
The [Input] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll
wheel
Dimmer

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer

Sleep

TV
Input

Top

Surround,
THX,
All CH ST,
Stereo,
Pure A,
Direct,
DSP /

Sleep

Men
u
Aud
io

A
DJ

Setup/
Enter/
Return/
Cursor
/ / /

r
rve
Se

Display

M en

Enter

Disc

turn

S etu

E xi

Prev
CH

VOL /

VOL

ide
Gu

Muting

Display

Muting

Random

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Repeat

Main B

Press the scroll wheel.

Main A/
Main B

Angle Last Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

DSP

Test Tone,
CH SEL,
Level –/+

Audio SEL

L Night,
Re-EQ

RC-554M
RC-555M

To Select an Input Source

Standby
TV
Input

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

@.-'/

ABC

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Indication on the
upper line changes.

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Sleep
Top

M en

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Input

When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1, use
the input source buttons on the front panel.

Basic Operation of Remote Controller Buttons—Continued
To Operate a Connected Component (Mode Switching)

Press the [Mode] button.
The [Mode] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

Indication on the lower line
changes to indicate the
selected component mode.

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Before operating the connected component, follow the
instructions pages 124 through 133 to make appropriate
settings using the remote controller.

Sleep
Top

M en

Operations

Mode

Macro

Men
u

r
rve
Se

Aud
io

To Select a Source in Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
The [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel.

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

Indication on the upper
line changes to indicate
the selected input.

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Zone 3
Zone 2

Sleep
Top

M en

Men
u

r
rve
Se

Aud
io

When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1,
press the [Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]), and press the input
source buttons.

To Perform a Macro Operation
Before performing the following procedure, complete
your macro settings (See page 137).
On

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

WXYZ

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Press the [Macro] button.
The [Macro] button lights.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the macro’s
number, and then press the scroll wheel.

Custom
Zone 3

Macro
Scroll wheel

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Sleep
Top

M en

r
rve
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Customizing Your Remote Controller
Use the [Custom] button “to enter the remote controller code for another apparatus to this remote controller,” “to make
this remote controller learn specified operations from the remote controller for another apparatus,” or “to make this
remote controller learn a series of operations with macro functions” according to the configuration you are using. For
detailed information, see pages 136-142.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations
• Before you plug in the RDC-7.1, confirm that all connections have been made properly.
• Turning on the power may cause a momentary power surge, which might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit, such as computers. If this happens, use a wall outlet on a different circuit.
• The RDC-7.1 is shipped with the main power (Power) switch in the on position (
On ). When the power cord is
plugged in for the first time, the RDC-7.1 will automatically enter the standby state and the [Standby] indicator will
light (same condition after step 2 below on the left column).
Input source buttons

Standby/On

Master Volume

Standby indicator

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

Video 5

Dimmer

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tape 2

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuner

Phono

Setup

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

To wall outlet
Power

Turning on the Power

Operating on the RDC-7.1

Power
On

Off

Standby

Plug the power cord into an AC
wall outlet.
Press the [Power] switch to set the
RDC-7.1 to standby state.
The [Standby] indicator will light up.

Press the [Standby/On] button to
turn on the RDC-7.1.
The display will light up and the
[Standby] indicator will turn off.
If you press the [Standby/On] button
again, the RDC-7.1 returns to the
Turn off
standby state.

DVD

Video 1

Video 2

Video 3

Video 4

Video 5

Video 6

Video 7

Tape 1

Tape 2

Tuner

Phono

Net Audio

Select an input source.
Press the input source button.
*You cannot listen to a source in main
room A, and to another source in main
room B.

Standby/On

Standby

Start playing the device selected.
When playing a picture device such as a
DVD player, you need to switch input to a
monitor such as a TV set.
Some picture-playing devices such as a
DVD-type game machine may also
require setting of sound output. Refer to
the manual of the device connected.

Adjust the volume level with the
[Master Volume] dial.
You can adjust the volume level in the
range from –∞, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB
(when Relative is selected in the Volume
Setup sub-menu).
Hint:
The RDC-7.1 is a product for users to
enjoy home theater, so it is equipped
with a wide range of volume levels.
Please fine tune the volume level
according to your preferences.

Note:
Any components connected via
will also be turned
on when the remote controller’s [On] button is pressed.

Master Volume

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations—Continued
Operating with Remote Controller

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

Main A

Main B

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel
Mode

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Top

M en

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

VOL

E xi

Prev
CH

turn

Roll the scroll wheel to select a
device to play.
Carry out this operation when neither the
[Mode] button nor the [Input] button
lights. If any button lights, press it to turn
it off.
Rolling the scroll wheel lights both
buttons, and switches the input source and
the mode at the same time.

Start playing the device selected.
When playing a picture device such as a
DVD player, you need to switch the input
to a monitor such as TV set.
Some picture-playing devices such as a
DVD-type game machine may also
require setting of sound output. Refer to
the manual of the device connected.

Adjust the volume level with the

Muting

Main B

Random

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Repeat

VOL /

ide

S et

Display

Main A

Input

Sleep

Angle Last Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Main B

DSP
Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

RC-554M
RC-555M

Turning on the Power from the
Remote Controller
Before you can use the remote controller, you must
perform steps 1 and 2 in the “Turning on the Power”
section and place the RDC-7.1 in the standby state.

VOL

Press the scroll wheel.
“AMP” appears on the remote controller’s display. This is the mode for controlling the RDC-7.1.

2
On

Press the [On] button to turn on
the RDC-7.1.
To set the RDC-7.1 to Standby, press the
[Standby] button.

Press the button for the room
where you want to play your
device.
Main A: Switches to operations in main
room A.
Main B: Switches to operations in main
room B.
When Main A or Main B is selected, the
indicator on the front display of the
RDC-7.1 lights.
If the mode is already effective, you do not
need to press. If you press this button, the
mode becomes ineffective.
The speaker set in the Speaker/Output
Setup menu sounds in the room selected.

Operations

On
Standby

[VOL
] button.
You can adjust the volume level in the
range from –∞, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB
(Max) (when Relative is selected in the
Volume Setup sub-menu).
Hint:
The RDC-7.1 is a product for users to
enjoy home theater, so it is equipped with
a wide range of volume levels. Please finetune the volume level according to your
preferences.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations—Continued
Adjusting the Brightness of the Front Display
Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

Video 4

DSP

Video 5

Dimmer

Video 6

Tape 1

Video 7

Tuning

Preset

Tape 2

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

Dimmer

RDC-7.1

Phones

Dimmer

Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

JKL

RDC-7.1

Remote
controller

Standby
TV

GHI

You can adjust the brightness of the front display of the
RDC-7.1 using the [Dimmer] button on the remote controller or on the RDC-7.1 front panel (other than European models).
Use the [Dimmer] button on the
RDC-7.1 to select: normal, dark,
very dark, and volume only.
On the remote controller, press the
scroll wheel, and then press the
[Dimmer] button.

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

T V VOL

Clear

Dimmer

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer

TV
Input

Top

M en

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Exi

Prev
CH

Temporarily Turning Off the Sound (remote
controller only)

Sleep

Dimmer

turn

Use the [Muting] button to temporarily turn off the
sound immediately.

VOL

id e
Gu

p
Setu

Display

Muting
Muting

Listening with Headphones

Remote
controller

To listen with headphones, plug a pair of headphones
with a standard stereo plug into the Phones jack on the
RDC-7.1 front panel.
Muting
Exit

Phones

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

• When you connect headphones, no sound will be
heard from the speakers.
• While the Dolby Headphone feature is active,
appears on the front display. Refer to pages 60, 61,
and 120.
Note:
The signal to the remote zone (Zone 2/3) will not be
affected whether or not headphones are connected.

Press the scroll wheel, and then
press the [Muting] button on the
remote controller.
When pressed, “Muting” is displayed on
the RDC-7.1. Press the [Muting] button
again to turn the sound back on.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations—Continued
Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Sleep
Top

M en

rv
Se

Enter

Disc

Exi

Prev
CH

turn

VOL

id e
Gu

p
Setu

Display

Muting

Random

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

Surround

CH SEL

Sleep

Men
u
Aud
io

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

To change the individual speaker volumes temporarily,
follow the procedure given below. Each channel can be
set between –12 and +12 decibels (between –15 and
+12 decibels for the subwoofer). Note that the speaker
volumes will return to the original settings when the
RDC-7.1 is put in the standby state.

Press the scroll wheel to enter the
AMP mode.

Press the [CH SEL] button and
select the desired speaker.

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Caps

Temporarily Changing the Speaker Output
Levels (remote controller only)

Level–
Level+

Operations

Scroll wheel

CH SEL

RC-554M
RC-555M

3
Using the Sleep Timer (remote controller only)

Level -

Press the [Level –] or [Level +] button to adjust the volume level.
Level +

With the sleep timer you can set the RDC-7.1 so that it
automatically turns off after a set period.
Remote
controller

Sleep

Press the scroll wheel, and then
press the [Sleep] button repeatedly to select the required sleep
time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute increments.
The [SLEEP] indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been set,
as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about five
seconds, then the previous display
reappears.
Note:
If you are using the remote zone (Zone 2 or
3), it will turn off at the same time as the
main zone.

Note:
You cannot select a speaker if it is set to “Not Used” in
the Speaker Configuration Sub-menu of the Speaker/
Output Setup Menu.

To cancel the sleep timer, press the
[Sleep] button repeatedly until the
[SLEEP] indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press
the [Sleep] button. Note that if you press
the [Sleep] button while the sleep time is
being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations—Continued
When an input source other than FM or AM is selected:
Input

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Program format*

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

Video 4

DSP

Video 5

Dimmer

Video 6

Tape 1

Video 7

Tuning

Preset

Tape 2

Tuning Mode Memory

Standby

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

TV
Input

AV Controller

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

Display

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

RDC-7.1

Custom name
Listening mode

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

*When the input signal is digital audio other than PCM

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

TV
Input

en
pM

rv
Se

Exi
t

Prev
CH

turn

VOL

id e
Gu

p
Setu

Display

Muting

Random

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Surround

Audio SEL

Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Display

Men
u

When the input signal is linear PCM

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Caps

Input

Sleep

Dimmer

Re-EQ
L Night

RC-554M
RC-555M

Switching the Display
While listening to or watching an input source, you can
display information regarding the type of source and signal being input.
RDC-7.1
Display

Remote
controller

The program format is displayed. For example, the display “Dolby D: 3/2.1” shows that the format is Dolby
Digital with 5.1 discrete channels consisting of three
front channels (front left, front right, and center), two
surround channels (surround left and surround right),
and the low frequency effect (LFE) channel.
When the front channel number is 2, they are the front left
and front right; when it is 1, it is monaural. When the surround channel number is 1, it is monaural; when it is 0,
there is no surround channel. When no LFE number is
given, there is no LFE channel. Also, if there is no program
format for the input signal, nothing will be displayed.

Press the [Display] button on the
RDC-7.1.
On the remote controller, press the
scroll wheel, and then press the
[Display] button.

The sampling frequency is displayed. For example, the
display “PCM fs: 44.1k” shows that the signal is PCM
and that the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz.
Dialog norm
Dialogue Normalization (Dialog Norm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital. When playing back software that has
been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see
a brief message in the front panel display that reads Dialog Norm xdB (“x” being a numeric value). Dialogue
Normalization serves to let you know if the source
material has been recorded at a higher or lower level
than usual. For example, if you see the message “Dialog
Norm: +4” in the front panel display, to keep the overall
output level constant the output volume has been automatically decreased by 4 dB. In other words, the source
material that you are listening to has been recorded 4 dB
louder than usual.

When FM or AM is selected as the input source:
Display

Custom
name

Preset
no.

Listening
mode

FM/AM +
Frequency
Listening
mode

Preset
no.

Connecting the Power/Basic Operations—Continued

The RDC-7.1 accepts analog, digital, i.LINK (AUDIO)
and multichannel signals for audio input. You can
choose the kind of signal to be played for a specific
device. For Zone 2, the RDC-7.1 accepts only analog
and digital signals for audio input.

Input

Audio SEL

Press the [Input] button, and then
roll the scroll wheel to select the
input source you want to set.

Press the scroll wheel and then
press the [Audio SEL] button.
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
changes from “Auto” → “Analog”→
“Multich”→ “i.LINK” and back to
“Auto.” The “Auto” audio mode is recommended for normal circumstances.

Auto (XXX) (automatic detection): With this setting,
the RDC-7.1 automatically detects whether the input
signal is digital or analog. When a digital signal is not
input, then the analog signal is played. This setting only
appears if a digital input is selected for the Digital Input
setting at Setup Menu → Input Setup Menu → Audio
Assign Sub-menu→ Digital Audio (See page 99).
(XXX) displays the name of the assigned terminal.
Multich (Multichannel): Select this setting to play back
the input from the component connected to the MULTICH IN 1/2 port. This setting only appears if “1” or “2” is
selected for the Multichannel setting at Setup Menu →
Input Setup Menu → Audio Assign Sub-menu→ Multichannel (See page 98).
Analog: Select this setting to playback the input from a
source component connected to analog audio input jacks.
With this setting, even if a digital signal is input from the
same component, only the analog signal will be output.
i.LINK: Select this setting to play back the input from a
source component connected to the i.LINK (AUDIO) terminal. With this setting, only the i.LINK signal will be
output. This settings is available when any device is
selected at Input Setup menu → Audio Assign Sub-menu
→ i.LINK.

Using the Re-EQ Function
This function corrects soundtracks with a strong treble
level to the home theater level. This correction should
be made when the treble sounds from the front speakers
are too strong.
Hint:
This can also be set on the menu with OSD. The listening
mode which the Re-EQ effect can be applied to has a
Re-EQ option in the Listening Mode Setup menu.

Press the scroll wheel, and then
press the [Re-EQ] button (repeatedly).

Operations

Changing the Audio Mode (remote controller
only)

Re-EQ

Using the Late Night Function
(only in Dolby Digital)
The difference between loud and quiet sounds is very
large in pictures produced for movie theaters, so you have
to raise the volume level to catch environmental sounds
and human conversations. Since the Late Night Function
is able to reduce the difference between loud and quiet
sounds, you can hear quiet sounds without raising the
entire volume level. This function is helpful when you
enjoy movies late at night by turning down sounds.
This function is released when putting the RDC-7.1 into
the standby status.
Hint:
This function can also be set on the menu with OSD
(See page 109).

L Night

Press the scroll wheel, and then
press the [L Night] button (repeatedly).
Off: Turns off the Late Night function.
Low: Reduces the difference between
loud and quiet sounds.
High: Further reduces the difference
between loud and quiet sounds.
The previous display comes back after a
while.
Notes:
• The Late Night function is effective
only for Dolby Digital sources.
• The Late Night function may be less
effective or have no effect depending
on the Dolby Digital source.

Using the Listening Modes
Types of Listening Modes
Listening modes on the RDC-7.1 enable you to enjoy
movie theater or concert hall quality sounds in your
room. The RDC-7.1 provides the following listening
modes. Before playing a source in optimal sound, be
sure to complete the Speaker/Output Setup (See pages
92-94).
Direct
This mode allows you to enjoy pure sounds straight
from an original source. Every channel of the audio
input source will be output “as is” to respective channels.
Pure Audio
In addition to the Direct mode, playback of music more
faithful to the original sounds is enabled because the
display window is turned off to minimize noise sources
(the power supply to the video circuitry is also turned
off, so nothing is displayed on the screen).
Stereo
Sounds are output from the right and left front speakers,
and the subwoofer.
Mono
This mode is suitable for playing old movies recorded
in monaural sound, or for playing the right and left
channels separately on bilingual sources. This mode
also allows you to listen to multiplexed soundtracks on
DVDs and other sources.
Dolby Pro Logic II
This mode enables 5.1 channel playback of music and
movies recorded in 2 channels. You can select the Movie
mode, best designed for playing movies, the Music
mode, best designed for listening to music, and the
Game mode, best suited for enjoying games.
• PLII Movie
This mode can be used with VHS and DVD videos
with the
mark, and certain television
programs.
• PLII Music
This mode can be used with stereo music CDs and
DVD recordings of live concerts.
• PLII Game
This mode can be used with game discs.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
This mode reproduces in 5.1-7.1 channels music CDs
and movies recorded in 2 channels. Together with
clearer sounds, you will hear more natural and smoother
surround effects than ever before. In addition to CDs
and movies, game sources are played with a dramatic
spatial presentation and with sound localization. And
this mode enables 7.1 channel playback of music and
movies recorded in 5.1 channels. You can select the
PLIIx Movie and PLIIx Music mode.
• PLIIx Movie
This is the best mode for viewing movies.
• PLIIx Music
This is the best mode for playing music.

• PLIIx Game
This is the best mode for enjoying games, providing
the best sense of signal movement.
Dolby Digital
This is a surround mode that will make you feel as if you are
sitting in a seat inside a theater or concert hall. This mode
can be used with DVDs and LDs with the
mark.
Dolby VS (Dolby Virtual Speaker)
The dynamic surround sound effects specific to 5.1
channel speakers are reproduced through 2 speakers.
When combined with “Dolby Pro Logic II”/“DTS
NEO:6,” this mode provides 5.1 channel surround
music recorded in 2 channels on CD or MP3 through
only 2 speakers. This mode can also be applied to a system equipped with more than 2 speakers.
If you are able to use only 2 speakers in a separate room
(Zone 2 or Zone 3) or main room B, this mode will let
you experience truly powerful sounds of a movie, CD or
game through the virtual surround effects. When you
use this mode with three or more speakers, the speakers
used for output will depend on the input source and
decoding mode.
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music or
movies recorded in 5.1 channels. Adding a surround
channel to the backside of 5.1 channel speakers to make
them 6.1 channel speakers will enhance space
expressions that should give you a real feel of moving
sounds such as 360-degree rotation or overhead flying.
Since sounds on the surround back channel are divided
into the surround left and right channels, this mode also
enables conventional 5.1 channel playback. When
playing DVDs and LDs recorded in 5.1 channels with
the
mark, Dolby Digital EX mode turns on, and
when playing other sources, Dolby EX turns on.
DTS
Sound data that would be of tremendous size if completely divided into 5.1 channels are compressed into
digital data with a status as close as possible to the original sounds. Playing in this mode requires a DVD player
able to output DTS. This mode can be used with CDs,
DVDs and LDs with the
mark.
DTS 96/24
This is a listening mode available with DTS 96/24. This
mode allows you to enjoy delicate sounds.
DTS-ES Discrete
This is a 6.1 channel surround system based on DTS
with a surround back channel added. Since all 6.1 channels including the added surround back channel are
recorded as completely independent digital data, a 3-D
feeling and a sense of moving sounds are reproduced
more clearly. This mode can be used with CDs, DVDs,
and LDs with the

mark.

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

be used with CDs, DVDs, and LDs with the
mark.
DTS NEO:6
This mode enables 6.1 channel playback of music and
movies recorded in 2 channels. A broad frequency band
is allocated to each channel, and every channel is kept
very independent. This mode can be set to the Cinema
mode, best designed for playing movies, and the Music
mode, best designed for listening to music.
The sources recorded in 5.1 channels are played in NEO:6.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Surround effects full of moving sound feelings are
reproduced. This mode is suitable for 2 channel
recorded VHS videos, DVD videos, and television
programs.
• NEO:6 Music
Since it uses a surround channel, this mode creates a
natural sound field, which cannot be expected from
ordinary 2 channel output. This mode is suitable for
playing CDs recorded in 2 channels.
AAC
Digital data compressed through the MPEG-2 AAC system reproduces surround sounds of 5.1 channels at
maximum. This mode can be used for playing AAC
sources such as a BS-digital-broadcasted program.
Multiplex
This mode is used for listening to multiplex broadcasts.
THX
This mode produces the maximum effects on a THXcompliant speaker system.
• THX Cinema
This is a 5.1 channel THX mode, designed for viewing theatrical films recorded and edited on the
assumption that they will be played in a sizable place
like a movie theater. The audio output for the surround back channels depends on the input source and
decoding mode.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
This is the THX Ultra 2 mode. This mode enables 7.1
channel playback of music and movies recorded in
5.1 channels. It analyzes surround factors to be reproduced, and distributes the factors to the surround back
to optimize the atmosphere and the sense of orientation. This function reinforces the horizontal and backward extension, and the sound location.
• THX Music Mode
This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing
music sources. It enables 7.1 channel playback of 5.1
channel recorded sources.
• THX Games Mode
This is the THX Ultra 2 mode designed for playing
game sources.

• THX Surround EX
“THX Surround EX” - Dolby Digital Surround EX is
a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the
THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology
are able to reproduce an extra surround back channel
which has been added during the mixing of the program. A list of Surround EX encoded movies can be
found on www.Dolby.com.
• Multichannel
This is a listening mode available with analog multichannel connection.
• i.LINK: DVD-Audio
This is a listening mode used for playing DVD-Audio
format sources during i.LINK (AUDIO) connection.
• i.LINK: SACD
This is a listening mode used for playing Super Audio
CD format sources during i.LINK (AUDIO)
connection.

Operations

DTS-ES Matrix
This mode plays in 6.1 channels the music and movies
recorded in DTS-ES. Sources recorded in DTS-ES
include data for the surround back channel, and each
channel is reproduced in 6.1 channels. This mode can

IntegraRESEARCH’s Proprietary Listening
Mode (DSP)
All Ch Stereo
This mode is useful for playing music as BGM. Stereo
sounds are provided by all speakers, so you can enjoy a
powerful sound field.
Full Mono
Monaural sounds are provided by all speakers. You can
listen to the same tone of music wherever you are.
Mono Movie
This mode is suitable for playing old movies recorded
with monaural sound. The center channel outputs straight
sounds, while other speakers provide center sounds with
adequate echo effects. Despite monaural sound, you can
enjoy the feeling of being in a movie theater.
Enhance
This mode is suitable for playing music, and watching
sports programs on television. Environmental sounds
are move naturally to the surround and surround back
speakers, so more dynamic sounds are reproduced.
Orchestra
This mode is suitable for playing classical music and
operas. The surround effects are reinforced to extend the
sound image throughout the listening room. You can
enjoy the natural touch of music as if you are sitting in a
large concert hall.
Unplugged
This mode is suitable for listening to acoustic sounds,
vocals and jazz music. Because it focuses on the front
sound image, this mode creates an image of the sound
field that makes you feel as if you are listening to music
in front of a stage.
Studio-Mix
This mode is suitable for rock‘n’ roll and popular
music. The image of powerful sounds is reproduced as
sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in a live
house.

Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TV Logic
This mode is suitable for television programs broadcast
from studios. You may feel as if you are sitting in a television studio. All of the surround sounds are enhanced,
and conversations are output clearly.
Listening Modes for Listeners Using
Headphones
Dolby Headphone
This mode makes headphones reproduce dynamic surround sound effects like 5.1 channel speakers. The listening mode used before putting on headphones is
applied to the headphones. However, the following listening modes will be decoded as follows:
• The Dolby VS or Stereo mode sources will be
decoded in the Dolby Headphone mode.
• The source decoded in the 7.1ch surround format will
be decoded in the 5.1ch surround format.
• The DTS 96/24 mode source will be decoded in the
DTS format.
Listening modes when the Dolby Headphone is set to
“Off”:
Direct
When the listening mode was Direct before putting on
headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the same
as the Direct mode indicated previously.
Pure Audio
When the listening mode was Pure Audio before putting
on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the
same as the Pure Audio indicated previously.
Mono
When the listening mode was Mono, Mono Movie or
Full Mono before putting on headphones, this mode is
applied. Effects are the same as the Mono mode indicated previously.
This mode is also applied when you listen to the monaural source in the Dolby VS listening mode before putting on headphones.
Stereo
When the listening mode was other than Direct, Pure
Audio, Mono, Mono Movie or Full Mono before putting on headphones, this mode is applied. Effects are the
same as the Stereo mode indicated previously.
Multiplex
When the listening mode was Multiplex before putting
on headphones, this mode is applied.

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

The RDC-7.1 provides various listening modes.
Note:
The available modes depend on the input signal you
selected.
Input source buttons

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

Video 4

DSP

Video 5

Video 6

Tape 1

Video 7

Tuning

Dimmer

Preset

Tape 2

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

DSP

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

9
WXYZ

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Scroll wheel
Mode

Zone 2

Macro

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

M en

rv
Se

Enter

Disc

Exi
t

Prev
CH

Men
u
Aud
io

turn

VOL

de
Gui

p
Setu

Display

THX
Surround

Muting

Random

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

Surround

Pure A
Direct

Repeat
Pure A

Input

Sleep
Top

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

All CH ST
Stereo
DSP
DSP

RC-554M
RC-555M

Operating on the RDC- 7.1

Press the input source button.

Start playback on the device you selected
for input.

Use the [ ] DSP [
listening mode.

] buttons to select a

Operating with the Remote Controller

Roll the scroll wheel to select a device for playback.
Perform this operation when neither the [Mode]
button nor the [Input] button lights. If any button
lights, press it to turn it off.
Rolling the scroll wheel lights both buttons, and
switches the input source and the mode at the
same time.

Start playback on the device you selected
for input.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the
listening mode button you want to select.
Pure A button: To switch the listening mode to
“Pure Audio.” When you select “PURE AUDIO,”
the video signal is interrupted (resulting in a
blacked-out screen), and the [Pure Audio] indicator lights up.
Direct button: To switch the listening mode to
“Direct.”
Stereo button: To switch the listening mode to
“Stereo.”
Surround button: To switch the listening mode
to the surround mode.
• When 5 channel signals are input, every time
you press the button, the listening mode
changes “DolbyEX” → “PLIIx Movie
(Default)” → “PLIIx Music” → “NEO:6” →
“Off” → “DolbyEX,” and so on.
• When 2 channel signals are input, every time
you press the button, the listening mode
changes “PLIIx Movie (Default)” → “PLIIx
Music” → “PLIIx Game” → “NEO:6 Cinema”
→ “NEO:6 Music” → “PLIIx Movie
(Default),” and so on.
THX button: To switch the listening mode to
“THX.”
• When Dolby Digital multichannel (*/2) signals
are input, you can switch to any of the
following decode modes. Every time you press
the button, the listening mode changes “THX
Cinema” → “SurroundEX” → “Ultra2 Cinema
(Default)” → “MusicMode”→ “Games Mode”
→ “THX Cinema,” and so on (See page 115).
DSP/DSP buttons: Every time you press
the buttons, you can switch to any of the listening
modes according to the input signals.
ALL ST button: To switch the listening mode to
“All Ch Stereo.”
[ ]/[ ] cursor buttons:
• When AAC’s multiplex sound signals are
input, the main-sound and sub-sound are
switched. Every time you press the [ ]/[ ]
buttons, the mode changes “Main” → “Sub”

Operations

Selecting the Listening Mode

→ “Main + Sub” → “Main,” and so on.
• When using the headphones, you can use the
[ ]/[ ] buttons to switch on/off the Dolby
Headphone listening mode.
Tip:
A table listed later in this manual shows which listening
mode can be used with which input signal format. See
page 143.

Listening to Radio Broadcasts
This feature requires the tuner terminal board [K] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.

Using the Tuner
One of the features of the RDC-7.1 that is most frequently
used is its ability to play FM and AM broadcast radio
stations. The RDC-7.1 provides a number of listening
modes perfect for listening to the radio and getting the
most out of your audio system. Also, by presetting radio
stations that you listen to frequently, you can select them
easily by pressing the [CH/Disc +/–] button on the remote
controller.
Setting the AM Tuning Interval
For the Asian or Australian models, you have to adjust the
“AM Frequency Step” setting according to your area.
Use the Setup menu to adjust the “AM Frequency Step”
setting.
To perform this setting, go to “Hardware Setup” → “AM
Frequency Setup” → “Frequency Step,” and select “9 kHz”
or “10 kHz.” For details on this setting, see page 91.

Tuning into a Radio Station

Band

When the FM stereo broadcast contains much noise:
Press the [Tuning Mode] button to switch to the manual
tuning mode. The “AUTO” indication disappears and the
tuner turns into the monaural mode. In the monaural
mode, the noise will be reduced and the broadcast be
easier to hear.
Tuning into a Radio Station Manually
(manual tuning)

Press the [Tuner] input source
button.
Each time you press the [Tuner] button,
the input source changes between AM
and FM.

Tuner

Frequency

Tuning Mode Memory

Press the [Tuning Mode] button to
turn off the “AUTO” indication.

Clear
Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

Video 1

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

Video 4

DSP

Dimmer

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tuning Mode Memory

Tape 2

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Clear

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Continue to press the Tuning
[ ] or [ ] button.
When the tuner comes near the frequency
you want to listen to, release the button.
Then press the Tuning [ ] or [ ] button
repeatedly to adjust the frequency in
frequency steps.

Tuning

AV Controller

Tuning

RDC-7.1

Tuning Mode

Tuning into a Radio Station Automatically
(automatic tuning)

Tuner

2
Tuning Mode Memory

Press the [Tuner] input source
button.
Each time you press the [Tuner] button,
the input source changes between AM
and FM.

• The tuner frequency changes in 200 kHz (50 kHz)
increments for FM and 10 kHz (or 9 kHz) increments
for AM.
• When you tune into an FM station manually, the tuner
turns into monaural mode. If you want to listen to the
FM station in stereo, press the [Tuning Mode] button.

Press the [Tuning Mode] button to
turn on the “AUTO” indication.

Specifying Radio Stations by Frequency
Remote controller

Clear

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

3
Tuning

Press the Tuning [ ] or [ ] button
once.
The tuner stops automatically where it
tunes into a station.
When you tune into a radio station,
TUNED
indicator appears in the
display. If you tune into an FM station in
stereo, then “FM STEREO” appears.

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

--/---

To select a radio station by
entering its frequency, press
the remote controller’s [Direct
Tuning] button, and then use
the number buttons to enter
the frequency.

Listening to Radio Broadcasts—Continued
Selecting a Preset Radio Station
Tuner

Preset

When using the RDC-7.1:
Master Volume

Standby/On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Tuner

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

Dimmer

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tuning Mode Memory

Tape 2

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Clear

Open/Close

Net Audio

Press [Tuner] input source button
on the RDC-7.1.

Exit

Phones

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Tuning Mode Memory

Preset

Using the Preset [ ] and [ ]
buttons, select the number of the
desired preset station.

Up to 40 stations can be stored in memory as preset radio
stations.

Tune into the radio station you
desire (See “Tuning Into a Radio
Station”).

2
Tuning Mode Memory

Operations

Presetting a Radio Station
When using the remote controller:

1
Input

Press the [Memory] button on the
front panel.

Press the [Input] button, and then
use the scroll wheel to select
TUNER.
To switch to FM or AM, press the scroll
wheel.

Flashes
Clear

2
3

Preset

4
Tuning Mode Memory

Clear

Using the Preset [ ] and [ ]
buttons, select a preset number
(from 1 to 40) to assign the station.
The “MEMORY” indicator blinks for 5
seconds. Complete the procedure while
the “MEMORY” indicator blinks. If the
“MEMORY” indicator disappears before
completing the procedure, go back to step
2 and repeat the procedure again.

Use the [CH/Disc +/–] button to
select the presets.
+

Selecting Presets by Number

To select a preset by number, use the
remote controller’s number buttons. For
example, to select preset #7, press [7]. To
select preset #12, press [1] then [2].

Disc

Erasing a Preset Radio Station

Tuner

Press the [Memory] button to
finalize the procedure.
Lights

Press the [Tuner] input source
button and use the Preset [ ] and
[ ] buttons to select the preset
radio station that you want to
erase (See above).

Preset

You can enter text names for any of the
preset radio stations (See page 101).

2
Tuning Mode Memory

Clear

Press and hold the [Memory]
button and then press the [Tuning
Mode] button.
The selected preset station is erased.

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only)
Listening to RDS Broadcasts
RDS reception is available only on the European model
and only in areas where RDS broadcasts are available.
What is RDS?

RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a type of FM
broadcasting. RDS was developed within the European
Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most
European countries. Many FM broadcasting stations
now transmit the RDS signals, which provide the additional information required. RDS provides you with various services so that you can choose a station that
broadcasts your favorite categories of music, news, or
other information.
There are three main classifications of RDS broadcasts.
Though they can be tuned into by using the Tuning buttons as normal stations, RDS broadcasts allow you to
scan for stations of the type and classification for which
you are looking. This makes it much easier for you to
find the station you want (See “Performing a PTY Scan”
and “Performing a TP Scan” on page 65). The three main
classifications are explained below.
RT: Radio Text
When an RDS station broadcasting RT information is
selected, the text information received from the station is
displayed.
PTY: Program Type
When an RDS station broadcasting PTY information is
selected, the station type (classification) is displayed.
TP: Traffic Program
When an RDS station broadcasting TP information is
selected, traffic information will be broadcast periodically.
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the display
of the RDC-7.1 may not be exactly the same as the
ones broadcast by the radio station. Also, unusual
characters may appear on the display if the RDC-7.1
receives characters that cannot be displayed correctly.
This is not a malfunction.
• When an RDS station broadcasting PS information is
selected, the name of the station is displayed instead
of the frequency.

PTY Program Types in Europe
The text given in parentheses is what is actually displayed on the RDC-7.1.
None (NONE):
No program type.
News reports (NEWS):
Reports on current events and happenings.
Current affairs (AFFAIRS):
Topical reporting of current affairs, often with a wider
range of topics than news reports.
Information (INFO):
General information such as weather forecasts, consumer affairs, medical help, etc.
Sports (SPORT):
Live sports action, sports news, and interviews.
Education (EDUCATE):
Formal educational programs.
Drama (DRAMA):
Radio plays and serials.
Culture (CULTURE):
Cultural programs (including religious affairs).
Science and technology (SCIENCE):
Programs about the natural sciences and technology.
Varied (VARIED):
Speech-based programs not covered by the above categories (e.g., quizzes, panel games, and comedy).
Pop music (POP M):
Popular commercial music, usually from past or present
sales charts (e.g., Top 40).
Rock music (ROCK M):
Popular music with an alternative appeal, often not
appearing on sales charts.
Middle of the road music (M.O.R. M):
Easy listening music (as opposed to Pop, Rock, or Classical).
Light classics (LIGHT M):
Classical music for general rather than specialist appreciation.
Serious classics (CLASSICS):
Performances of major orchestral works, symphonies,
chamber music, etc. (including Grand Opera).
Other music (OTHER M):
Music styles not covered by the above categories (e.g.,
Jazz, Rhythm & Blues, Folk, Country, and Reggae).
• Alarm (ALARM):
When an RDS station is making an emergency broadcast, this ALARM will flash on the display.

Listening to RDS Broadcasts (European models only)—Continued

Tuner

Enter

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

RT/PTY/TP

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tuning Mode Memory

Tape 2

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Open/Close

Net Audio

Enter

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

RT/PTY/TP

Enter

RDC-7.1

Press the [Enter] button dial.
The RDC-7.1 will scan until it reaches a
station of the program type you selected.
It will then stop briefly at that station
before continuing on until it reaches the
next station. Pressing the [Enter] button
dial stops the PTY scan at that point. If
you press the [RT/PTY/TP] while
“NONE” is displayed, “PTY ?” will
appear. In this case, return to step 3.

Displaying Radio Text (RT)

RT/PTY/TP

To display the radio text, press the
[RT/PTY/TP] button once.

• If the current station you are listening to is not an RDS
station, only the frequency of the station will appear.
• If “Waiting” appears on the display, more time is
required to receive the RT information. When the
information is received, the characters will scroll
across the front display.
• If “No Text Data” appears on the display, RT information is not available.
• The display shows the frequency for 3 seconds and
returns to program service name.

5
Enter

Performing a TP Scan

Press the [Tuner] input source
button.
Tuner

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.

RT/PTY/TP

“[TP]” will appear if the current station is
broadcasting TP signals. This station will
periodically broadcast traffic information.
To find a different station, proceed to the
next step. Also, if “TP” is displayed,
proceed to the next step.

Performing a PTY Scan

1
Tuner

Press the [Tuner] input source
button and select the FM input
source.

3
Enter

2
RT/PTY/TP

Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on the
display.

Press the [Enter] button dial when
it reaches the station that you want
to listen to.
“Not Found” will appear when no RDS
signal is being received from the station.

Operations

If the station you are currently tuned into is broadcasting
RT signals, they will be displayed in the front display on
the RDC-7.1. If the station does not, this function will be
ignored.

Press the [Enter] button.
The RDC-7.1 will scan until it reaches a
station broadcasting traffic information. If
“Not Found” appears on the display, a TP
station cannot be located.

Using the [ ] and [ ] cursor
buttons, select the PTY program
type you desire.

Enjoying Multichannel Playback
The multichannel playback feature requires the multichannel terminal board [E] to be inserted in the RDC-7.1.
The RDC-7.1 can be connected to two devices, such as
a DVD player, that deal with multichannel sounds (5.17.1 channels).
To use multichannel connections, you need to specify
settings on the Input Setup menu. In addition, you can
set listening modes as you prefer. Enjoy multichannel
playback in the main room.

How to Set Up
Specify the input source type. At default, DVD is “1,”
CD is “2,” and others are “No.”
GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

How to Connect

Scroll
wheel

Zone 2

Mode

Input

TV
Input

Top

Enter
/ / /

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL
1

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

PH
SUB

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Exi

turn

VOL

id e
Gu

Setup

p
Setu

Display

Rec

M en

Prev
CH

Input

Sleep

Dimmer

Use three or four audio connection cables or a multichannel connection cable to connect the multichannel
output jack on the connected device to the MULTI-CH
IN jack on the RDC-7.1.
If the multichannel option board that contains two
multichannel terminal sets is installed, use the same
procedure as described above for making connection.

Macro

Muting

Main A

Main B

Random

H S VIDEO

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

SBL

MULTI
- CH

FR
ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

DIGITAL IN

IN 1

SUB

SBR

SBL

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the
scroll wheel to select the input source to
be set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the
[Setup] button to display the Main menu.

Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input
Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.

Press the [ /[ ] buttons to select “Audio
Assign,” and then press the [Enter] button.

Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
“Multichannel,” and then select a setting
with the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
Select “1” when connected to MULTI-CH
IN 1, or “2” when connected to MULTI-CH
IN 2.
*MULTI-CH IN 2 can be selected when your
multichannel option board contains two
multichannel terminal sets.

Press the [Setup] button.
Setting is completed, and the menu screen disappears.

( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

OUT

S VIDEO

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

L
CENTER

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

PRE OUT A

FRONT

SUB

CENTER

SURR

SURR
BACK

Enjoying Multichannel Playback—Continued
Playing Back in Multichannel Sound
Zone 2

Input

Top

M en

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Exi

Prev
CH

Enter

Disc

E xi

Prev
CH

turn

VOL

turn

VOL

id e
Gu

p
Setu

Display

VOL /

Muting

id e
Gu

p
Setu

Random

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

Muting

Surround

Random

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

Surround

THX

Repeat

A-B

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Memory
Caps

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level Ar tist

DSP

Repeat

Level –/+

Stereo

All CH ST
Search

CH SEL

THX

Repeat

Operations

Display

Audio SEL

Enter

Disc

Sleep

Dimmer
TV
Input

Input

Macro

Mode

Scroll wheel

Adjusting the Volume Level of
Speakers for Multichannel Playback

DSP
Photo
Level +

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Genre

RC-554M
RC-555M

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the
scroll wheel to select the input source to
be set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press
(repeatedly) the [Audio SEL] button to
select “Multich.”

Start playing.

Adjust the volume level with the [VOL
]
buttons.
You can also adjust the volume level in the range
from –∞, –81.5 dB to 18.0 dB (when Relative is
set for Volume Setup).

RC-554M
RC-555M

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the
[CH SEL] button to select a speaker
whose volume level you want to adjust.
Speakers set by the Speaker Configuration submenu on the Speaker/Output Setup menu are displayed on a one-by-one basis.

Press the [Level –/+] button to adjust the
volume level.
You can adjust in the range from –12 dB to
+12 dB. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the
range from –15 dB to +12 dB.

Hint:
The volume level of each speaker for multichannel
sounds is different from the calibration level to be set
with the test sound described on page 94. Adjustment
made here is not reflected in playing other than the multichannel playback.

You can also set the listening mode in advance for multichannel playback (Listening Mode Preset). To do so,
select “Input Setup” → “Listening Mode Preset” →
“Multichannel” on the Setup menu to choose the preferred mode. This defaults to “Multichannel.”
See page 59 for details of the listening mode, and page
100 for the listening mode preset.
To configure the listening mode settings including
audio effect and playback options:

You can specify detailed settings for the decode mode
and the speaker environment for multichannel playback
(Listening Mode Setup). See page 106 for details.

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone
(Zone 2/3)
You can connect speakers and amplifiers for the remote
zone, and enjoy different sources in a remote zone
(Zone 2 or Zone 3).
There are two ways to enjoy in a remote zone:

Connect the pre-main amplifier or
receiver for Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the
RDC-7.1.
Connect to any of the following terminals:
• AUDIO OUT 1-5
Default:
Analog 4 (AUDIO OUT 4): Zone 2 Out
Analog 5 (AUDIO OUT 5): Zone 3 Out
• DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2
• DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone
3 to the pre-main amplifier or receiver.

Connect the video component for Zone 2
or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO
OUT 1-4 terminals.

Set the Setup menu.
1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select
“Speaker/Output Setup” → “Audio Output
Assign,” and set the terminal to which the
component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or
“Zone 3 Out.”
2. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in
the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to
“Line Out (fixed).”
3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” →
“Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal
to which the component is connected to
“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out.”
4. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.

Connecting and Setup
When Connecting the Pre-main Amplifier or
Receiver (Zone 2 or Zone 3)
• You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone while
a 7.1 channel source is being played in the main room.
• Adjust the volume level on the pre-main amplifier or
receiver in the remote zone.
Main Room

Power amp

RDC-7.1

Zone 2/Zone3

OUT

VIDEO

TV
IN
R

Receiver/
Pre-main amplifier

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)—Continued

• You can enjoy a different source in a remote zone
while a 7.1 channel source is being played in the
main room.
• Adjust the volume level on the RDC-7.1 (not on the
power amplifier).
Main Room

Power amp

Set the Setup menu.
1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select
“Speaker/Output Setup” → “Audio Output
Assign,” and set the terminal to which the
component is connected to “Zone 2 Out” or
“Zone 3 Out.”
2. Then, set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” in
the Audio Output Assign sub-menu to “Pre
Out (variable).”
3. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” →
“Video Output Assign,” and set the terminal
to which the component is connected to
“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out.”
4. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.

Operations

When Connecting the Power Amplifier (Zone 2
or Zone 3)

Enjoying Movies and Music in a
Remote Zone
RDC-7.1

Zone 2/Zone3

OUT

VIDEO

• The sleep timer in the main room also works in Zone
2 and Zone 3. To make the sleep timer effective only
in Zone 2 or Zone 3, set the sleep timer on the
RDC-7.1 in the main room, and then put it into the
standby status.
• Sounds and pictures that can be output to Zone 2 and
Zone 3 are as follows:

From Input
Terminal

poweramp

Connect the power amplifier for Zone 2 or
Zone 3 to the RDC-7.1.
Connect to any of the following terminals:
• AUDIO OUT 1-5
• DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2
• DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

Connect the speakers for Zone 2 or Zone
3 to the power amplifier.

Connect the video component for Zone 2
or Zone 3 to any of the composite VIDEO
OUT 1-4 terminals.

✔

Audio Input

Video Input

REC/
ZONE
ZONE To Output Terminal
2
3
✔

ETHERNET,
PH,
AUDIO IN 1-9

AUDIO OUT 1-5
DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2
DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 1-6,
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 1-6

VIDEO IN 1-6,
S VIDEO IN 16, COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1-6

✔*2

✔*1 AUDIO OUT 1-5

✔

DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2

✔

DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2

✔*3

✔*3 VIDEO OUT 1-4
S VIDEO OUT 1-4
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

*1 Only PCM output
*2 Possible for 2 channel downmix signal.
*3 In the case of COMPONENT VIDEO IN, possible if
the HDMI slot is inserted.
Columns covered by “ \ ” indicate that no setting related
to the column is specified for Zone 2 Out or Zone 3 Out
in “Audio Output Assign” or “Video Output Assign.”

Enjoying Movies and Music in the Remote Zone (Zone 2/3)—Continued
Operating with the Remote Controller
When operating with the remote controller, how to
operate depends on the location of Zone 2 or Zone 3, or
the distance from the RDC-7.1.
• Point the remote controller at the infrared receiver on
the RDC-7.1, and then operate the controller.
• Install a remote controller sensor in Zone 2 or Zone 3
through an IR connection (See pages 46-49).
• Switch the Transmission Signal Format to RF (Radio
Frequency) (depending on the destination) (See page
141).

Operating on the RDC-7.1
Standby/On
Standby indicator

Master Volume
Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

Dimmer

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tuning Mode Memory

Clear

Tape 2

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Input source buttons and
Zone 2 Off
Rec/Zone 3 indicators
On

Standby
TV
Input

On, Standby

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

WXYZ

T V VOL

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

M en

rv
Se

Ex i

turn

VOL

de
Gui

p
Setu

Muting

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

Adjust the volume level.
For Zone 2: Press the [Zone 2] button, and then
adjust with the [Master Volume] dial.
For Zone 3: Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and
then adjust with the [Master Volume] dial.
Notes:
• When a pre-main amplifier or receiver is connected to the RDC-7.1, the volume level
should be adjusted at the connected component
side.

Display

Repeat

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Prev
CH

Zone 3
Zone 2

CH Disc +/–

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1, and
then select a source for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
For Zone 2: Press the [Zone 2] button, and then
select the source with the input source buttons.
The indicator above the selected input source
button will light green.
For Zone 3: Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and
then, select the source with the input source buttons. The indicator above the selected input
source button will light red.
When you press the [Zone 2] or [Rec/Zone 3]
button, the [Standby] indicator on the RDC-7.1
blinks for three seconds, so perform operations
while it is blinking.
When the same input source is selected for Zone
2 and Zone 3, it will light orange.
To switch the source for Zone 2 (or Zone 3) and
the main room simultaneously:
Repeatedly press the [Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3])
button to display “Z2Sel:SOURCE,” and then
select the source.

Sleep
Top

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Main B

Random

Angle Last Memory

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

DSP

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

DSP

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Level –/+

RC-554M

Power on the devices in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Press the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and then
the [On] button.

Select a source.
Rotate the scroll wheel to select a source while
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button is lighted (if the
button is not lighted, press the [Zone 2] or [Zone
3] button to light it).
• When you have selected the tuner, you can
choose a preset channel with the [CH Disc
+/–] button.

Adjust the volume level.
Press the [Zone 2] (or [Zone 3]) button, and
within 5 seconds, press the [Level –/+] button to
adjust the volume level.
Notes:
• When the pre-main amplifier or receiver is
connected, the volume level should be adjusted
at the connected component side.
• When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the
[Zone 2] (or [Zone 3]) button, and then press
the [Standby] button.

Recording a Source
The RDC-7.1 can not only record the playing source but
can also record a source while playing another source.
You can also combine a video and audio to create a new
source.
Signals that can be output to a video/audio recording
device vary with the type of jack connected. Check the
following conditions before starting recording:
Audio
• Signals (analog) from the ETHERNET, PH, or
AUDIO IN jacks are output only to the AUDIO OUT
jacks. Music signals of MP3, WMA, and WAVE to be
played with Net Audio are also output only to analog
audio output jacks.
• No signal is output from the MULTI-CH IN jacks.
• The signal supplied through the HDMI IN terminal
will be always present on the HDMI OUT terminal.
• Signals from the DIGITAL IN OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks are output to the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. PCM signals are converted
into analog signals, and also output to the AUDIO
OUT jacks.

Operations

• When not using Zone 2 or Zone 3, press the
[Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]) button, and then
press the [Standby/On] button. Or press the
[Zone 2] (or [Rec/Zone 3]) button, and then
press the [Off] button. In the case of Zone 2,
the green indicator above the input source
button is turned off, and in the case of Zone 3,
the red indicator is turned off.
• When operating in the main room, be sure to
confirm that the [Standby] indicator is not
blinking, and then start operations. When not
using in the main room, press the [Standby/
On] button. If the RDC-7.1 is in the standby
status, the power supply to Zone 2 and Zone 3
is not switched off.

Video
• Video signals from the VIDEO IN, S VIDEO IN, or
COMPONENT VIDEO IN jack are output only to the
VIDEO OUT jacks.

Recording a Source—Continued
Some steps can also be operated on the remote controller, but described here are operations on the RDC-7.1.
Notes:
• No surround effects can be recorded.
• No DVD or any sources whose copyright is protected
can be recorded.
• There are some restrictions on recording of digital
audio/video signals. Refer to the manual of your
recording component.
• If recorded as analog signals, DTS signals are
recorded as noise, so never record signals from a
DTS-compatible CD or LD.
Input source buttons
and indicators
Standby indicator

Press the input source button to select
the component for audio/video recording
(player side).

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and press it
again within 3 seconds.
The “RecSel:SOURCE” is indicated in the display window, and the indicator above the selected
input source button lights in red.
Audio/video recording is enabled on the component for which “Rec Out” was specified in step 3.

Prepare the component for audio/video
recording (recorder side).
• Put the component for audio/video recording
into the recording standby status.
• You should adjust the recording level on the
recording component.
• For how to record, refer to the manual of the
recording component.

Start audio/video recording.
Play the component selected in step 4.
• Switching the source during audio/video
recording will record the source newly
selected.
• If you select FM (or AM) with the [Tuner]
input source button when the recording source
is set to AM (or FM), the output for the recording source also changes to AM (or FM).

Master Volume

Standby/On
On

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

Dimmer

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Video 7

Preset

Tape 1

Tuning Mode Memory

Tape 2

Tuner

Phono

Setup

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

Rec/Zone 3

Setup

RDC-7.1

/ / /

Recording Audio/Video While Playing
Recording music or a movie you are currently playing.
Operate on the RDC-7.1 in the main room.

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1.

Check the connection to your recording
component.
An audio recorder should be connected to the
AUDIO OUT or DIGITAL OUT jacks, and a
video recorder to the VIDEO OUT jacks.

Check settings for a recorder connected.
1. On the Setup menu (See page 95), select
“Speaker/Output Setup” → “Audio Output
Assign,” and specify “Rec Out” as the setting
for the jack to which your audio recording
component is connected.
2. Similarly, select “Speaker/Output Setup” →
“Video Output Assign,” and specify “Video
XX Rec Out” as the setting for the jack to
which your video recording component is
connected.
3. Press the [Setup] button to close the menu.
Hint:
Since Zone 3 Out and Rec Out use the same circuitry, audio recording is disabled if Zone 3 Out
is specified. Audio/video recording is also disabled on the same component as that for playing.

Recording Audio/Video on a
Component While Playing Another
You can record an audio source or a video on a component while playing another source on another component. For example, you can record a CD while watching
a DVD. Operate this function the RDC-7.1 in the main
room.

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1 in
MAIN A or MAIN B mode.
Proceeding to the next step in the Standby status
makes the Zone 3 mode effective, so be sure to
turn on the power source.

Check connections and settings to the
recording component.
Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/
Video While Playing” in the previous section.

Press the [Rec/Zone3] button, and within
3 seconds, select the source to be
recorded with input source buttons.
Pressing the [Rec/Zone 3] button makes the
[Standby] indicator blink for 3 seconds. Select
the target sources while the indicator is blinking.
The name of the source to be recorded is indicated in the display window. Audio/video recording is enabled on the component for which “Rec
Out” was specified in step 2.

Prepare the component for audio/video
recording (recorder side).

Start audio/video recording.
You cannot listen to a broadcast from one station
while recording a broadcast from another station.

Recording the Video from one Source
and the Audio from Another Source
You can add audio signals from a source to a video of
another source to make your own custom video recordings. Below is an example of recording audio signals
from a CD player connected to the DIGITAL IN OPTICAL 2 jack and the video from a video camera connected to VIDEO IN 3 onto a video cassette tape on a
VCR connected to VIDEO OUT 2.
Operate this function in the main room.

Turn on the power supply to the RDC-7.1
in MAIN A or MAIN B mode.

Check connections and settings to the
recording component.
Refer to steps 2 and 3 in “Recording Audio/Video
While Playing” on page 72.

Press the [CD] input source button.

Press the [Setup] button to display Main
menu, and use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select “Input Setup.”
After selecting “Input Setup,” press the [Enter]
button.
To carry out steps 3-6 on the remote controller, follow the procedures described on page 90.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Video
Assign,” and press the [Enter] button.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Composite Video,” and set it to “3” with the
[ ]/[ ] buttons.
After setting to “3,” press the [Setup] button.

Insert a CD in the CD player and insert a
tape in the video camera connected to the
VIDEO IN 3 jacks.

Insert a tape in the VCR connected to the
VIDEO OUT 2 jacks.

Press the [Rec/Zone 3] button, and within 3
seconds, select “RecSel:CD” with the [CD]
input source button.
Now, the CD player has been selected as the audio
input source, and VIDEO 3 as the video input
source.

Operations

Recording a Source—Continued

recording on the VCR, and start play10 Start
ing on the CD player and the video camera.
Playback starts on the component selected in
steps 3-6.
Note:
Switching the source during audio/video recording will record the source newly selected.

Connecting Net Audio – USA, Canada, and Australian models –
You can enjoy Net Audio when the ETHERNET terminal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.

About Net-Tune
The RDC-7.1 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a
standard Ethernet network, allowing you to play music
(MP3, WAV) stored on your Net-Tune server such as
Integra NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server through the
RDC-7.1. If your network is connected to the Internet,
you can also tune into Internet radio stations.
Internet Radio
With Internet radio you can:
• Listen to stations that use MP3 format streaming.
• Select stations by genre, location, or language.
• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.
Net-Tune
For audio delivery over Ethernet, IntegraRESEARCH
developed NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it’s
based on the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it’s
efficient and very responsive.
The Net-Tune server supports the MP3 and WAV formats.
• WAV: high-quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.
• MP3: high-quality, compressed, small file size.
For more information about Net-Tune, see the following
IntegraRESEARCH Web sites.
• http://www.integraresearch.com/

Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network

The RDC-7.1’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-T switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s theoretically possible to
use a wireless network, due to unpredictable performance, it may not provide satisfactory results, so a
wired network is recommended.
■ Ethernet Router

A router manages the network, routing data and supplying IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The
RDC-7.1 needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP address information to network
devices, allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recommended.
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable

Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type).
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)

To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

Connecting Net Audio – USA, Canada, and Australian models –—Continued
Notes:
• To use Internet radio with the RDC-7.1, your broadband Internet connection needs to be up and running
and able to access the Web. Please consult your ISP if
you have any problems with your Internet connection.
• The RDC-7.1 uses DHCP and AutoIP to configure its
network settings automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually, see page 122.

• The RDC-7.1 does not support PPPoE settings, so if
you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must
use a PPPoE-compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
(see page 122).

Networking Your RDC-7.1

Net-Tune server such as Integra
NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server

RDC-7.1
A

C DIGITAL IN

Operations

To connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (NetTune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network. Here it’s connected to a
LAN port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
You can connect any number of RDC-7.1s to the network, and the Net-Tune server can serve up to three clients
simultaneously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a NetTune network with two RDC-7.1s.

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

Y
SUB

IN 1

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

PR
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

LAN/
Ethernet
port

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

MAIN

PB
1

ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
5

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

UJJ

VIDEO

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

CENTER

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

AC INLET

SURR

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

PRE OUT A

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

Internet radio

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

Internet radio

Modem
Modem

Router

LAN port

WAN port

LAN port
LAN port

Router

LAN port

Net-Tune server such as Integra
NAS-2.3 Network Audio Server

LAN/
Ethernet
port

Room 1

Room 2

Connecting Net Audio
– Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
About Net-Tune
A Net-Tune server is a computer server running NetTune system protocol, including a Net-Tune-compatible
home server or a PC with Net-Tune Central installed.
The RDC-7.1 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a standard Ethernet network. By installing IntegraRESEARCH’s
Net-Tune Central server software on your computer, you
can play all of your MP3, WMA, and WAV files through
the RDC-7.1. If your network is connected to the Internet,
you can also tune into Internet radio stations.
Internet Radio
With Internet radio you can:
• Listen to stations that use MP3 or WMA format
streaming.
• Select stations by genre, location, or language.
• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.
Net-Tune
For audio delivery over Ethernet, Onkyo developed
NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it’s based on
the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it’s efficient and
very responsive.
You can download the Net-Tune Central server software
from the following Web sites:
• Europe: http://www.integraresearch.net/
• Asia, Oceania, and Latin America:
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/
Net-Tune Central searches your PC’s hard disk for
music files and automatically creates a music database,
making it very easy to set up. Net-Tune clients, including the RDC-7.1, can then play music in the database.
Net-Tune Central supports the following file formats,
and sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
• WAV: high quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.
• MP3: high quality, compressed, small file size.
• WMA: high quality, compressed, smaller file size
than MP3, developed by Microsoft (Protected WMA
files cannot be played).
Before you download Net-Tune Central, you’ll be
prompted to enter the serial number printed on the rear
of your RDC-7.1. Depending on your Internet connection, it may take 10 or more minutes to download.
Net-Tune Central Editing Functions
With Net-Tune Central you can edit the titles, album,
and artist names of your MP3, WMA, and WAV files,
and create and edit genre names. In addition, you can
make playlists of your favorite tracks.

Computer Requirements
The computer requirements necessary for running the
Net-Tune Central server software are as follows:
• Operating system: Windows XP or 2000 (Mac OS
not supported).
• Processor: Intel Pentium III, 600 MHz or higher
• Memory: 128 MB (Windows 2000)
256 MB (Windows XP)
• Display: 800 x 600 pixels or higher, High Color
• LAN/Ethernet network port
• Sound capabilities
• Hard disk: At least 20 MB for Net-Tune Central.
Obviously you’ll also need space to store your music
files. MP3 and WMA uses approximately 1 MB per
minute, while WAV uses approximately 10 MB per
minute, although this will depend on the sampling rate
and bit rate that you use. MP3 files made using certain
encoders may not be playable, or may be noisy when
played.
Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network

A router manages the network, routing data and supplying IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation).
NAT allows several networked computers to access
the Internet simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The RDC-7.1 needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP address information to network
devices, allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recommended.
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable

Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight type).
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)

To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued
Notes:
• To use Internet radio with the RDC-7.1, your broadband Internet connection needs to be up and running
and able to access the Web. Please consult your ISP if
you have any problems with your Internet connection.
• The RDC-7.1 uses DHCP and AutoIP to configure its
network settings automatically. If you want to configure
these settings manually, see page 122.

• The RDC-7.1 does not support PPPoE settings, so if
you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must
use a PPPoE compatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
(See page 122).

Networking Your RDC-7.1

Operations

To connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (NetTune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the RDC-7.1 to your Ethernet network. Here it is connected to a
LAN port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
You can connect any number of RDC-7.1s to the network, and Net-Tune Central can serve up to three clients simultaneously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a Net-Tune
network with two RDC-7.1s.
RDC-7.1
A

C DIGITAL IN

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

MULTI
- CH

COAXIAL

AUDIO IN G

IN 1

H S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

IN 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

(( HD/BNC
HD/BNC ))

RS 232

HDMI

Y
SUB

IN 1

GND

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

SBR

HDMI, the HDMI logo
is a trademark
or registered
trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

PR
FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

SBL

IN 2

REMOTE
CONTROL

12V
TRIGGER
OUT
A
200mA MAX.

B 100mA MAX.
C
100mA MAX.

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

D 100mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

Internet radio

MAIN

PB
3

ZONE 2

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

PR
3

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

UJJ

S VIDEO
IN

OUT

IR
( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

CENTER

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

AC INLET

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

SURR BACK L
( SINGLE)

PRE OUT A

Internet radio

R
FRONT

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

( ASSIGNABLE)

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

ETHERNET

Modem

( Net-Tune )

To the WAN side
Modem

To the LAN side port

To the WAN side
Router

To the LAN side port

Router
To the LAN
side port

To the LAN side port
Room 1

Room 2

To the LAN
side port

PC
LAN port/
Ethernet, etc.

You can install Net-Tune central on several networked computers and use the RDC-7.1’s Select Server setting to select
the server whose music database you want to access (See page 99).

About Network Configuration
When you use a broadband router with the DHCP function enabled, the network settings will be configured automatically. In this case, you do not have to make any settings using the setup menu. If you disabled the DHCP function on
the broadband router, configure the network settings manually referring to page 122.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued
Using the Remote Controller

Scroll wheel

To select Net-Tune mode, press the [Mode] button,
and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears
on the display.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source
and remote controller mode simultaneously (when you
enter the Net-Tune mode, be sure that the LCD display
shows “MSRV” or “IRD” in the top line and “NET-T” in
the bottom line).

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Sleep

Dimmer
TV
Input

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

VOL

E xi

Prev
CH

A
DJ

en
pM

turn

ide

S etu

Display

Muting

Rec

Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Angle Last Memory
Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

DSP
Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

RC-554M
RC-555M

Random

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued
1 Number/letter buttons

E Stop

These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters
when searching for music in your Net-Tune server.

2 Mode button

button
This button is used to stop playback.

F Random button
This button is used for random playback.

3 Up/Down/Left/Right

& Enter

buttons
These buttons are used to navigate Internet radio
and Net-Tune server menus. The [Enter] button is
used to confirm items and to start playback of the
Net-Tune server.

4 CH/Disc +/– button
This button is used to select Internet radio presets.

5 Play

button
This button is used to start playback of the Net-Tune
server.

G Artist button
This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s
music library by artist.

H Genre button
This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s
music library by genre, and to search for Internet
radio stations by genre.

Operations

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,
and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears
on the display.

I Location button
This button is used to search for Internet radio stations by country.

J Language button
This button is used to search for Internet radio stations by language.

6 Previous/Next

/
buttons
The Previous
button is used to select the previous track. During playback it selects the beginning of the current track. The Next
button is
used to select the next track.

7 Pause

button
This button is used to pause playback.

8 Repeat button
This button is used for repeat playback.

9 Album button
This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s
music library by album.

0 Playlist button
This button is used to search the Net-Tune server’s
library by playlist.

A Caps button
This button is used to select lowercase letters,
uppercase letters, and numbers when searching for
the Net-Tune server’s music by album, artist, or
playlist.

B Delete button
This button is used to delete characters entered with
the number/letter buttons.

C Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
“MSRV” (Music Server) or “IRD” (Internet Radio)
appears on the display.

D FR/FF
The FR
FF

buttons
button is used to start fast reverse. The

button is used to start fast forward.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued

Net Audio
Master Volume

Standby/On

Enter

Standby

Pure Audio

Zone 2 (GRN )
Rec/ Zone 3 ( RED)

Power
On

DVD

Off

Zone 2

Rec/ Zone 3

Video 1

Off

Video 2

Display

Video 3

DSP

Video 4

Video 5

Video 6

Tuning

Dimmer

Tape 1

Video 7

Preset

Tape 2

Tuning Mode Memory

Tuner

Setup

Phono

Enter

Open/Close

Net Audio

Exit

Phones

Clear

AV Controller

RDC-7.1

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

WXYZ

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Mode

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

M en

rv
Se

Prev
CH

turn

VOL

de
Gui

p
Setu

Display

Muting

Main A

Subtitle
THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

Main B

Angle Last Memory

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Caps

Enter,
/ / /

Random

Rec

Audio
Surround
Repeat

Input

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Exi

Display

CH/Disc +/–

Sleep
Top

Scroll wheel

RC-554M

Enjoying Internet Radio
To listen to Internet radio, the connection/configuration
requirements listed on pages 74, 76 must be satisfied.

While neither the [Input] button
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,
roll the scroll wheel to select
IRD (Internet Radio).
“NET-T” appears in the bottom line.
On the RDC-7.1, press the [Net Audio]
button. This button switches between
two alternative settings: Server and
Internet Radio.

Press the [Display] button on the
remote controller.
If the main menu has been already displayed, go to the next step.

If no list is found, “No List” appears.
You can return from this screen to the
previous selection screen by pressing the
[ ] button.

Press the [Enter] button.
You are presented with a list of radio station names.
Enter

Display

Enter

3
Enter

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
one of the main menus: Genre,
Location, or Language.
To cancel, press the [ ] button.

Press the [Enter] button.
Wait while your requested data is download from the XiVA Internet Radio Service.
*What is the XiVA Internet Radio Service?
The XiVA Internet Radio Service provides tuning information, allowing
you to select from a large number of
stations. You can find Internet Radio
Stations based on your interests,
musical taste, language, and location.
When Genre is selected:
Allow a few moments until the Genre
menu appears. When the main list of
genres appears, use the [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the genre desired. Pressing the
[Enter] button brings up the sub-list of
the genre you selected, which prompts
you to further select one of the items
using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
When Location is selected:
The list containing names of countries
appears. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select the desired item.
When Language is selected:
The list of languages appears. Use the
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select your desired
item.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
one of the radio stations.
You can return to the previous step by
pressing the [ ] button.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued

Press the [Enter] button.
Buffering starts with the following message displayed.

Press the [Enter] button.
The preset is now complete.
Enter

Enter

OSD

Choosing a Preset Internet Radio Station

While neither the [Input] button
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,
roll the scroll wheel to select IRD
(Internet Radio).

Use the remote controller’s
[CH Disc +/–] button to select the
preset.
When you choose a preset station, the
station name is displayed for 5 seconds,
and then the progress of buffering is displayed instead.

+
CH
Disc

iNet Radio Station ONK
7ch
Title:
Station ONK Live
Program:
Station ONK Live
Artist:
RealOnkyoNet.com
Data:
WMA 20kbps

When the progress of buffering reaches
100%, you will be presented with the
playing screen.
Erasing a preset Internet radio station

Tuned

Display

Select the station to erase, following the instructions described
above.

Press the [

Presetting Internet Radio Stations
You can preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.

Receive your desired station.

Press the [ ] button.
The RDC-7.1 enters into preset mode;
the currently selected preset number
blinks for 5 seconds.

Operations

When the buffering is complete, the
RDC-7.1 starts playback of the broadcast.
Note:
If you’re using a narrowband Internet
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN),
depending on the station, Internet radio
may not work satisfactorily. For best
results use a broadband connection (e.g.,
cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.).
You can switch the displayed content
using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
After the switch operation, the display
mode appears for 3 seconds, and then
the appropriate information scrolls.
If there is no information on title or artist, “No Info” appears.
When using the OSD screen, all the
information is displayed on one screen
without scrolling.

] button.
ch

Enter

The RDC-7.1 enters into preset erase
mode.

Preset number

Press the [Enter] button.
Your selected station is erased.
Enter

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued

“Disconnected”
The Net-Tune server may not start or the
server connected to previously may not
be found. Confirm the connections
between router, the Net-Tune server, and
the RDC-7.1. Start the Net-Tune server
or select another server referring to
“Select Server” on “Music Server Submenu” (See page 99).

Standby
TV
Input

Number/letter
buttons

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

@.-'/

ABC

WXYZ

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Sleep

Dimmer
TV
Input

Top

M en

rv
Se

Rrepeat
Album
Playlist

Prev
CH

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Exi

Display

turn

VOL

de
Gui

p
Setu

Display

Muting

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

Main B

Random

Angle Last Memory

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat
Test Tone

Scroll wheel
Input

Mode
Enter,
/ / /

Video
CH SEL

Music
Level Ar tist

DSP
Photo
Level +

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Genre

, , ,
, , ,
Random
Artist
Genre

RC-554M

Playing a Music File Saved on the
Net-Tune Server

4
Remote
controller

Press the [ ] button to play the
music file.
The RDC-7.1 provides five normal display modes; you can use the [ ]/[ ] button to switch among them.
OSD

Track:

Turn on the Net-Tune server.
Wait until the Net-Tune server starts up.
It may take a few second.

Turn on the RDC-7.1.
When you connect the RDC-7.1 to the network the first time, it will be connected to
the first server found.

While neither the [Input] button
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,
roll the scroll wheel to select
MSRV (Music Server).
“NET-T” appears in the bottom line.
On the RDC-7.1, press the [Net Audio] button. This button switches between two alternative settings: Server and Internet Radio.
Until the RDC-7.1 connects to the network, finds the server, and completes the
connection, “Network Starting...” and
“Connecting...” appears. After completing the connection to the Net-Tune
server, the display changes to the normal
indication.
If the following messages appear, check
the message meaning and perform the
appropriate procedures.
“No Track”
The Net-Tune server could not retrieve
any track information. Register tracks
with the Net-Tune server.
If you have already registered tracks, use
the [Display], [Artist], [Album],
[Genre], and [Playlist] buttons to display
information.

Play

1/12
1m20s>
My sweet candy

Album:
My Best 100
Artist:
Happy PanPot
Data:
MP3 160kbps

To play music files saved on your PC, the requirements
listed on page 76 must be satisfied.

Music Server

Display

• To stop playback:
Press the [ ] button on the remote controller.
• To pause playback:
Press the [ ] button on the remote controller.
• To select a track:
Press the [
]/[
] button on the remote controller.
Press the [
] button to move to the next track.
Press the [
] button to move to the beginning of
the current track; hold down the [
] button to
move to the previous track.
You can also use the number/letter buttons to select a
track.
Examples:
To select number 3, press 3.
To select number 10, press --/---, 1 and 0.
To select number 37, press --/---, 3 and 7.
To select number 123, press --/--- twice, and then
press 1, 2 and 3.
To select number 2568, press --/--- third, and then
press 2, 5, 6, and 8.
• To fast forward/reverse the music:
Press and hold the [
] button on the remote controller to fast forward the music; press and hold the
[
] button to fast reverse the music. When the
music track is back at its beginning, normal playing
starts.
• To switch to the track list:
While playing the music, you can press the [ ] button to display a list of currently open tracks.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued

You can use the music file data saved on the Net-Tune
server to select which tracks to play.
For example, you can:
• Select a track list based on the album name
• Select a track list based on the artist name
• Select a track list based on the genre name
• Select a play list

1
Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

2
Enter

3
Enter

Press either the [Album], [Artist],
[Genre], or [Playlist] button on the
remote controller.
Search the tracks stored on the Net-Tune
server with your selected mode to display it
in the display.
In the artist and album modes, the tracks
are displayed in alphabetical order.
You can also use the procedure below.
1. Press the [Display] button.
2. You can press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to
cyclically switch among the four
modes: Albums ↔Artists ↔ Genres
↔ Playlists.
3. Press the [Enter] button.
Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
one from the menu.
At this time, pressing [ ] button brings
you one step back where you can change
the selection you made.
Also, pressing [ ] button in the genre
or artist selection mode will display a
list of albums with the genre or artist
you selected.
In the album, artist, or playlist selection
mode, using the number/letter buttons
will accelerate your selection operation
(See below).
Press the [Enter] button.
The title of your selected track appears.
You can choose another track by pressing
the [ ]/[ ] buttons.
Press the [ ] button to return to the previous step.
You can also select the list number using
the number/letter buttons.

Using the number/letter buttons

Caps

Enter

Press the [Enter] button.
The playback begins.

CH SEL
Album

Caps

Level Ar tist

Level +
Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

The number/letter buttons allow you to input one of the
letters or numbers printed on their key tops. Pressing the
[Caps] button cyclically switches the types of input:
Upper case (A) → Lower case (a) → Numeric value (2)
→... When your desired input type is selected, then
press the number/letter button.
Let us take the [2ABC] button as an example to see the
operation.
When the upper case is selected:
Pressing the button once will perform a search by the
letter “A.” Pressing twice will do a search by “B,” pressing three times by “C.”
When the lower case is selected:
Pressing the button once will perform a search by the
letter “a.” Pressing twice will do a search by “b,” pressing three times by “c.”
When the numeric value is selected:
Pressing the button once will perform a search by the
numeric value “2.”
To cancel the operation:

Press the [ ] button to return to the previous step. You
can cancel the whole operation by pressing the [ ] button in step 1.
Notes:
• Press the [Delete] button to delete the entered letter or
number.
• Pressing the [Display] button on the main unit will
display the current listening mode.
Playing a Music File At Random
Random

Press the [Random] button on the
remote controller when in stop mode.
This button displays the current random
settings and switches between two alternative settings: On and Off.
On: Randomly plays the tracks in the
currently selected mode.
Off: Random mode is disabled.
After the necessary settings are complete, press the [ ] button.

Playing a Music File Repeatedly

Pure A

Test Tone
Playlist

Operations

Selecting a Track List

Repeat

Press the [Repeat] button on the
remote controller.
This button displays the current repeat
settings and cyclically switches among
three alternative settings: Repeat 1 →
All → Off.
Repeat 1: Repeats the current track only.
Repeat All: Repeats the tracks in the
currently selected mode.
Repeat Off: Repeat mode is disabled.
You can operate the RDC-7.1 when
playing and when stopped.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued
Configuring the Music Server

4
Enter

The music server settings can be made while you select
the music server as an input source.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
the “Music Server” sub-menu,
then press the [Enter] button.
The setup screen for the sub-menu
appears.

Enter
On

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
TV
Input

Sleep
Top

M en

rv
Se

Exi

Display

Input

turn

VOL

id e
Gu

Setup

p
Setu

Muting

Press the [Input] button, and
then roll the scroll wheel to select
MSRV.
Make sure that the “MSRV” is displayed
when you configure the music server.

Press the scroll wheel, and then
press the [Setup] button to display
the Main Menu.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
“Input Setup,” then press the
[Enter] button.
Enter

Enter

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Prev
CH

Enter,
/ / /

Scroll wheel
Input

Enter

Use the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons to select “Select Server” and
then use the [ ] and [ ] cursor
buttons to select the desired
server.
Select a network server that exists on the
network.
* mark appears next to the servers
detected on the network. If there is a
server that does not have a * mark, make
sure that the server is running.
“Not Found” message indicates that no
server is currently available for selection. If the message appears, make sure
that the server is connected and running.
Press the [Setup] button.
This completes the configuration procedure and the menu disappears.
Tips:
When choosing settings on the RDC-7.1,
use the input source buttons, the [Setup]
button, the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons,
and the [Enter] button.

Connecting Net Audio – Other than USA, Canada, and Australian models –
—Continued
Internet Radio Memo

Operations

Music Server Memo

Setup Menu
When making the various settings required to configure your RDC-7.1 for optimum performance, you can use either
the OSD Menu that appears on your television monitor or you can use the display on the front of the RDC-7.1. The OSD
Menu is a settings menu that is displayed on your TV monitor.
The RDC-7.1 is equipped with an independent Setup Menu not only for Main room A but also for Main room B and
Zone 2 room, which allows you to specify settings for each room. The Setup Menu includes various menus. These
menus are then divided into various sub-menus, and these contain settings for you to optimize your home theater as you
wish.
The display shown below is an example. The actual contents of your display may differ depending on the model
for your region, the option boards installed, and the selected input source.
For more information on operating instructions, see pages 90-123.

OSD Map (MAIN A)
Reference
pages

Main menu
Main A Setup
=====================
0.Hardware Setup
1.Speaker/Output Setup
2.Input Setup
3.Listening Mode Setup
4.Audio Adjust
5.Preference
6.i.LINK Setup
7.Network Setup
8.Lock/Version

0.Hardware Setup
=====================
1.Remote Control Setup
2.TV Format Setup

3.AM Frequency Setup

92
93
1.Speaker/Output Setup
=====================
1.Speaker Configuration
2.Speaker Crossover
3.Speaker Distance
4.Notch Filter
5.Level Calibration
6.THX Audio Setup
7.Audio Output Assign
8.Video Output Assign

94
95
96
98
99

2.Input Setup
==Input:XXXXXX=======
1.Audio Assign
2.Video Assign
3.Listening Mode Preset
4.Character Edit
5.IntelliVolume
6.Delay
7.12V Trigger Assign

100
101
102

103

*The text appearing with your unit may
differ slightly than those printed here,
however there is no difference in items to
be displayed or their meanings.

3.Listening Mode Setup
=====================

104

1.Mono Setup
2.Multiplex Setup
3.Stereo Setup
4.Direct, Pure Audio
Setup
5.Multichannel Input
Setup
6.i.LINK(IEEE1394)
:DVD-Audio Input Setup
7.i.LINK(IEEE1394)
:SACD Input Setup
8.Dolby Digital Setup
9.DTS Setup
10.AAC Setup
11.Dolby Pro LogicIIx/
DTS NEO:6 Setup
12.THX Setup
13.Mono Movie Setup
14.Enhance Setup
15.Orchestra Setup
16.Unplugged Setup
17.Studio-Mix Setup
18.TV Logic Setup
19.All Ch Stereo Setup
20.Full Mono Setup
21.Dolby Virtual
Speaker Setup
22.Dolby Headphone
Setup

105
107
108
109
110
111
113
114
115
116
117
118

Setup Menu—Continued
Reference
pages
4.Audio Adjust
=====================
1.Tone Control

119

5.Preference
=====================
1.Volume Setup
2.Headphone Level Setup

120

3.OSD Setup
4.OSD Position

Setup Menu

Main A Setup
=====================
0.Hardware Setup
1.Speaker/Output Setup
2.Input Setup
3.Listening Mode Setup
4.Audio Adjust
5.Preference
6.i.LINK Setup
7.Network Setup
8.Lock/Version

6.i.LINK Setup
=====================
1.Wakeup Setup
2.OSD for DVD
3.OSD for DVD
(Zone 2)
4.System Control Setup

7.Network Setup
=====================
1.IP Address
2.Proxy
3.MAC Address
4.Client
→Save Settings

121

122
123

8.Lock/Version
=====================
1.Lock Setup

123

2.Firmware Version

Setup Menu—Continued
OSD Map (MAIN B)
Reference
pages

Main menu
Main B Setup
=====================
0.Hardware Setup
1.Speaker Setup
2.Input Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Preference

0.Hardware Setup
=====================
1.TV Format Setup

1.Speaker Setup
=====================
1.Speaker Crossover
2.Speaker Distance
3.Level Calibration
4.THX Audio Setup

2.Input Setup
==Input:XXXXXXXXX====

93
94

100

1.Listening Mode Preset
2.Delay

102

3.Audio Adjust
=====================
1.Tone Control

119

4.Preference
=====================
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.OSD Position

120

Setup Menu—Continued
OSD Map (ZONE 2)
The Zone 2 settings shown on this
page can be made when you
perform the following settings in the
“MAIN A” setup menu.
• Under the “Speaker/Output
Setup → Audio (Video) Output
Assign” menu, when you select
the output terminal setting to
“Zone 2 Out.”

0.Hardware Setup
=====================
1.TV Format Setup

1.Input Setup
==Input:XXXXXXXXX====

Reference
pages
91

100

1.Listening Mode Preset

102

Setup Menu

2.Delay

103
Zone 2 Setup
=====================
0.Hardware Setup
1.Input Setup
2.Listening Mode Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Preference

2.Listening Mode Setup
=====================
1.Mono Setup
2.Multiplex Setup
3.Stereo Setup
4.Dolby Digital Setup
5.DTS Setup
6.AAC Setup
7.Dolby Virtual
Speaker Setup

104

109
110
111
117

3.Audio Adjust
=====================
1.Tone Control

119

4.Preference
=====================
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup

120

3.OSD Position

Setup Menu—Continued
Navigating the Setup Menu
You can change Setup Menu settings using the buttons on the front panel and on the remote controller.
The illustrations here represent the remote controller.
OSD

Main A Setup
=====================
0.Hardware Setup
1.Speaker/Output Setup
2.Input Setup
3.Listening Mode Setup
4.Audio Adjust
5.Preference
6.i.LINK Setup
7.Network Setup
8.Lock/Version

Front panel
display

1.Speaker/Output Setup
=====================
1.Speaker Configuration
2.Speaker Crossover
3.Speaker Distance
4.Notch Filter
5.Level Calibration
6.THX Audio Setup
7.Audio Output Assign
8.Video Output Assign

1-1.Speaker Config
=====================
Speaker A
a.Front L/R :Main
b.Center
:Main
c.Surr L/R :Main
d.Surr Back
:Main A 2ch
e.Subwoofer :Main

A
A
A
A

Main menu
Menu
Sub-menu

Press the button of the room where you
want to perform operations.
Press [Main A], [Main B], or [Zone 2].
If the room where you want to perform operations
has already been activated, you do not have to press
the button here. Pressing the button while the
corresponding room is activated deactivates the
room for setup.

Press the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears on your television monitor.

Using the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons,
select the menu that you want to enter.

Press the [Enter] button to enter the
selected menu.
The screen for that menu appears.

Use the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons to
select the sub-menu that you want to
enter and press the [Enter] button.
Each sub-menu has different settings that can be
changed as desired, and they are all explained in
the pages that follow. To change a setting, first
select it using the [ ] and [ ] cursor buttons,
and then change the setting using the [ ] and
[ ] cursor buttons.

Press the [Setup] button to exit the Setup
Menu.
Press the [Return] button to set the new settings
and return to the previous menu.

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Scroll wheel
Dimmer

Sleep

TV
Input

Top

M en

r
rve
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

+
CH

Enter

Disc

Prev
CH

VOL

E xi
t

ide
Gu

turn

S etu

Display

Setup/
Enter/
Return/
/ / /

Zone 2

Muting

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Repeat

Main B

Random

Rec

Angle Last Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Ar tist

Main A,
Main B

DSP

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Genre

RC-554M
RC-555M

1
90

Press the scroll wheel when using the
remote controller.

When setting on the RDC-7.1, use the [Setup] button, the
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons and the [Enter] button. In
addition, the [Exit] button is used instead of the [Return]
button.

Hardware Setup
In this section, you will perform the initial settings for the following scenarios.
• When you want to change the RDC-7.1’s remote control ID.
• When you want to fix the TV Format setting to PAL or NTSC.
• When you want to fix the AM Frequency Step setting to 9 kHz or 10 kHz.

Remote ID
This section explains how to change the RDC-7.1’s
remote control ID. You may need to change this if the
RDC-7.1’s remote controller interferes with other
IntegraRESEARCH components located in the same
room. You can select 1, 2, or 3 for remote control ID.
If you change the RDC-7.1’s remote control ID, be sure
to select the same ID for the remote controller (See page
142). The default ID for both the RDC-7.1 and remote
controller is 1.
Note:
It is recommended that you perform setup using the
[Setup]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Exit] buttons of the
RDC-7.1’s front panel. If the remote controller is used
for setup, signals from the remote controller will not be
received just after the remote control ID settings have
been changed (See “Changing the Remote Controller’s
Control ID” on page 142 to change the remote control
ID for the remote controller).

AM Frequency Setup Sub-menu
(Asian and Australian Models Only)
Frequency Step
The setting in this sub-menu determines the incremental
or decremental amount when adjusting the AM tuner
frequency. The initial setting is 9 kHz, and this only
needs to be changed if you are using the RDC-7.1 in a
10 kHz region.
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz increments are used in your area.
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz increments are used in your
area.

Setup Menu

Remote Control Setup Sub-menu

TV Format Sub-menu
TV Format (for all models other than USA and
Canadian models)
The settings in the TV Format sub-menu can be
configured for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
When you want to reconfigure the settings to conform
to the television format used in the area where you use
the RDC-7.1, use this sub-menu so that no time is
wasted on detection.
Auto: This is the default setting. When you leave this
setting unchanged, the television format is detected and
automatically set by the RDC-7.1.
PAL: Use this setting when you know the television
format is PAL.
NTSC: Use this setting when you know the television
format is NTSC.

Speaker/Output Setup
The RDC-7.1 provides a wide range of variations in speaker connections and speaker settings, so you have to specify
speaker settings according to conditions of each variation. For proper selection of an AV device connected at switching
of the input type, you also need to allocate “audio output” and “video output” to each input type. If this allocation is
incorrect, the desired component will not play a selected input source.
Please setup correctly by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet.

Speaker Configuration Sub-menu
Specify the rooms where you want to use speakers.
Specify according to settings for main room A.
Note:
Basically, a speaker set with the maximum number of
speakers should be assigned to the Speaker A and
configured for main room A (Main A).
When either the center, surround, or surround back
speakers are not configured to the Speaker A terminals,
or any of these speakers is set to “Not Used” in the
Speaker A settings, you cannot perform the settings for
the corresponding speakers configured to the Speaker B.
(Speaker A) Front L/R
The setting of the front speakers is initially fixed to
Main A.
Always install speakers configured to (Speaker A) Front
L/R in main room A.
(Speaker A) Center, Surr L/R
Main A (default): Select this when using the center
speaker and/or surround speakers in main room A.
Not Used: Select this when not using a center speaker
or surround speakers.
(Speaker A) Surr Back
Main A 2ch (default): If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,”
you can select this item. Select this when connecting
and using two surround back speakers in main room A.
Main A 1ch (SBL): If Surr L/R is set to “Main A,” you
can select this item. Select this when connecting and
using a surround back speaker in main room A.
Bi-Amp for Front: Select this when using the front
speaker in main room A by connecting the front channel
and the surround back channel to the speaker via BiAmp (See page 27).
Not Used: Select this when not using surround back
speakers.
Note:
If “Not Used” is selected for Surr L/R, this item defaults
to “Not Used.”
(Speaker A) Subwoofer
Main A (default): Select this when using a subwoofer
in main room A.
Not Used: Select this when not using a subwoofer in
main room A.
(Speaker B) Front L/R
Main A: Select this when using in main room A.
Main B: Select this when using in main room B.
Not Used (default): Select this when not using.

(Speaker B) Center
Main A: Select this when using in main room A.
Main B: Select this when using in main room B. This
setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)
Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”
Not Used (default): Select this when not using.
(Speaker B) Surr L/R
Main A: Select this when using in main room A.
Main B: Select this when using in main room B. This
setting can only be made when you set the “(Speaker B)
Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”
Not Used (default): Select this when not using.
(Speaker B) Surr Back
Main A 2ch: Select this when connecting and using two
surround back speakers in main room A.
Main A 1ch (SBL): Select this when connecting and
using a surround back speaker in main room A.
Main B 2ch: If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr L/R are
both set to “Main B,” you can select this item. Select
this when connecting and using two surround back
speakers in main room B.
Main B 1ch (SBL): If (Speaker B) Front L/R and Surr
L/R are both set to “Main B,” you can select this item.
Select this when connecting and using a surround back
speaker in main room B.
Bi-Amp for Front: This setting can be made only when
you set the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A”
or “Main B.” Select this when using the front speaker in
main room B by connecting the front channel and the
surround back channel to the speaker via Bi-Amp (See
page 27).
Not Used (default): Select this when not using
surround back speakers.
Note:
If (Speaker A) Surr Back is set to “Main A 1ch,” you
cannot select “Main A 2ch” and “Main B 2ch” here.
(Speaker B) Subwoofer
This setting can be made only when you set the “(Speaker
B) Front L/R” setting to “Main A” or “Main B.”
Main A: Select this when using a subwoofer in main
room A.
Main B: Select this when using a subwoofer in main
room B. This setting can only be made when you set the
“(Speaker B) Front L/R” setting to “Main B.”
Not Used (default): Select this when not using a
subwoofer.
When the settings for Speaker Configuration are
completed, the subsequent settings should be specified separately in main room A, main room B, and
Zone 2.

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued

The settings in the Speaker Crossover sub-menu can be
configured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”
Front L/R, Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back
Specify a threshold frequency in Hz for bass sounds
from each speaker to be output from the subwoofer.
When no subwoofer is used, (Speaker A) Front L/R is
automatically set to “Full Band,” and bass sounds from
each speaker are output from the front speakers. You
can also set other speakers to “Full Band.”
You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments
between 40-150 Hz. When using a THX-Select-certified
speaker system, specify the setting of 80 Hz (THX)
(default).
• If you specify the frequency of the front speakers
between 40-150 Hz, you cannot select “Full Band”
for the other speakers.
• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not
Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no
associated setting item is displayed.
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for
surround back speakers is displayed.
LPF of LFE (setting of the low-pass filter for
LFE)
Specify the low-pass filter for LFE (Low Frequency
Effect).
The low-pass filter passes through only the signal
components below the specified frequency, eliminating
the unwanted noise.
You can specify the frequency at 10 Hz increments
between 40-150 Hz.
SW Mode (Subwoofer Mode)
This item is displayed when a subwoofer is used (any
item other than “Not Used” is selected for Subwoofer
on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu), and Front L/R
is set to “Full Band” on the Speaker Crossover submenu. Set the sound from the subwoofer to any of the
following:
LFE only: The subwoofer outputs only LFE (Low
Frequency Effect) information.
D. Bass: The subwoofer outputs not only LFE (Low
Frequency Effect) factors but also bass sounds from the
front speakers.

1. Select the unit of distance from “Unit.”
You can select either “feet” or “meters.” The default
varies depending on the region.
2. Set the distance you measured. Enter all the values
for every speaker you connected.
• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not
Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no
associated setting item is displayed.
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for
surround back speakers is displayed.
When “feet” is selected:
Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at
0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0 foot to 30.0 feet.
The default is 12.0 feet.
Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr Bk R and Surr Bk L), and
Surr L can be set at 0.1 foot intervals in a range from 1.0
foot to 30.0 feet. The default is 7.0 feet.
When “meters” is selected:
Front L, Center, Front R, and Subwoofer can be set at
0.03 meter intervals in a range from 0.30 meters to 9.00
meters. The default is 3.60 meters.
Surr R, Surr Back (or Surr Bk R and Surr Bk L), and
Surr L can be set at 0.03 meter intervals in a range from
0.30 meters to 9.00 meters. The default is 2.10 meters.

Setup Menu

Speaker Crossover Sub-menu

Notch Filter Sub-menu
To configure the settings under the Notch Filter submenu, a special measuring device is required. Usually,
leave these settings to their defaults, “Off.”
A notch filter cuts the signal of certain frequency ranges
and passes the rest of the signal through. Some
characteristics due to a room’s environmental elements,
including walls and smallness of the room, cause a
signal peak in certain low frequencies to occur
at the resonance frequency, resulting in a boomy sound.
The filter reduces the signal at these frequencies causing
the boomy sound.
To know which frequency the peak occurs at, use a low
frequency sine wave generator and SPL (Sound
Pressure Level) meter to check the frequency and the
notch value.
Notch Filter
Off (Default): Select this setting when not applying the
notch filter.
On: Select this setting when applying the notch filter.
Frequency

Speaker Distance Sub-menu
Measure the distance between the listening position and
each speaker. Specifying the distance will synchronize
the speakers in terms of the time that sounds from each
speaker reach the listening position. This is an
important specification for you to enjoy realistic home
theater. The settings in the Speaker Distance sub-menu
can be configured for both “Main A” and “Main B.”
Perform the setup procedure below following the
operating instructions described on page 90.

When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch
filter becomes effective at the frequency you specify
here. With your measuring device, the frequency value
can be set at 1 Hz intervals in a range from 20 Hz to
300 Hz. The default is 100 Hz.

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued
Depth
When setting “Notch Filter” above to “On,” the notch
filter becomes effective at the value you specify.
You can specify intervals of 0.5 dB in a range from
–15 dB to 0 dB. The default is –10 dB.
Width
The available setting values are calculated based on the
values specified in the “Frequency” and “Depth”
settings above. You can choose any values according to
your favorite sound.

Level Calibration Sub-menu
Use this sub-menu to set the volume for each speaker so
that each volume is heard by the listener at the same
level. This is especially important for speaker layouts
where the left and right speakers are at different distances
or in asymmetrical positions due to room designs and
configurations. These settings and the distance settings
performed in the Speaker Distance sub-menu are vital for
creating proper sound space and dynamics. The settings
in the Level Calibration sub-menu can be configured for
both “Main A” and “Main B.”
• These settings cannot be made when the sound is
muted, when you connect the headphones, and when
you use multichannel playback.
• You cannot use the [Master Volume] dial while you
perform the Level Calibration settings. These settings
are intended to bring sound levels between speakers
into balance so as to obtain the proper sound space.
• This unit supports the THX format and the test
tone is output at a standard 0 dB (the Absolute
Volume value is 82). If you usually enjoy listening
at a lower level than the test tone, be careful of the
test tone’s sudden loud sound. Note that the test
tone will be output immediately after pressing the
[Enter] button in step 1 below.
1. When you display this setting screen, select “Level
Calibration,” and press the [Enter] button, the display
changes to the Level Calibration screen, and at the
same time, a sound is emitted from the front left
speaker.
2. Starting with the front speaker, press the [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and press the [ ]/[ ]
buttons to set the volume level. When you have set all
connected speakers, the setup is complete.
You can adjust in the range from –12 dB to +12 dB in
0.5 dB step. The subwoofer can be adjusted in the range
from –15dB to +12 dB in 0.5 dB step.
• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not
Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no
associated setting item is displayed.
• If “Surr Back is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no item for
surround back speakers is displayed.

THX Audio Setup Sub-menu
This is for setting up a home theater with a THX Ultra2
compliant speaker system. These settings will be
effective in the listening mode for the THX Ultra2
Cinema and THX Music Mode. The settings in the THX
Audio Setup sub-menu can be configured for both
“Main A” and “Main B.”
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer A/
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer B
This is for setting the connected subwoofer. Select
“Yes” or “No” according to your subwoofer’s
specification.
Yes: Set “Yes” if your subwoofer conforms to the THX
Ultra2 standard or if the playback capability of its bass
range extends down to 20 Hz. Otherwise, set “No.”
No (Default): Set “No” if you use any subwoofer that
does not fit the conditions above.
• For any speaker that is not available or set to “Not
Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, no
associated setting item is displayed.
Boundary Gain Compensation A/
Boundary Gain Compensation B
This is for setting the correction of boundary gains.
This item can be set when “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer” is
set to “Yes.”
Room boundaries (walls) or other characteristics (such
as construction materials) may increase the perceived
acoustics levels at low frequencies. Depending on the
listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener may
experience an excessive bass effect.
The purpose of this feature is to compensate for
excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect.
On: Boundary Gain Compensation is applied.
Off (Default): Boundary Gain Compensation is not
applied.

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued

This setting is allowed only when “Main 2ch” is
selected from the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
Place two surround back speakers as close together as
possible, measure the distance, and set the value (see
the figure). The maximum effects will be realized by
THX’s ASA* technology.

Analog 1-5
Set the analog audio output jacks of “AUDIO OUT 1-5.”
You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out,
Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out,
Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used.
AUDIO

0-1 ft (0-0.3 m)(Default): This is the setting when the
distance between the speakers is 0-1 foot (0-30 cm).
1-4 ft (0.3-1.2 m): This is the setting when the distance
between speakers is 1-4 feet (30 cm-1.2 m).
>4 ft (1.2 m): This is the setting when the distance
between speakers is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more.
*ASA: Advanced Speaker Array

Audio Output Assign Sub-menu
This setting allocates audio output jacks on the
RDC-7.1 to input (play) sources. The setting varies
depending on the connection conditions.
The RDC-7.1 is equipped with analog output jacks for
five lines, and digital output jacks: optical jacks (OPT)
for two lines, and coaxial jacks (COAX) for two lines. If
setting the analog jacks to “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3
Out,” you can also specify whether output should be
variable or fixed.
The default settings are as follows:
Terminals

OUT

Example 1:
When input (REC) of an audio recording device (e.g., a
cassette deck) with TAPE 1 as an input source is
connected to AUDIO OUT 1, set “Analog 1” to “Tape 1
Rec Out.”
Example 2:
When sound input of a picture recording device (e.g., a
VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected to
AUDIO OUT 2, set “Analog 2” to “Video 1 Rec Out.”
Example 3:
When the amplifier for Zone 2 is connected to AUDIO
OUT 5, set “Analog 5” to “Zone 2 Out.”
When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used.”

Setup Menu

Distance Between Surr Back A SP/
Distance Between Surr Back B SP

Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out
This item is displayed when “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3
Out” is specified for Analog 1-5 above. The default
setting for “Zone 2 Out” is “Pre Out (variable)” and for
“Zone 3 Out” is “Line Out (fixed).”
Pre Out (variable): Select this when you want to set
“variable” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or
Zone 3. You should operate the RDC-7.1 to adjust the
sound volume from the device in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Line Out (fixed): Select this when you want to set
“fixed” for output to a device connected to Zone 2 or
Zone 3. You should operate the amplifier connected to
the terminal to adjust the sound volume from the device
in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Default input settings

Analog 1 (AUDIO OUT 1)

Video 1 Rec Out

Analog 2 (AUDIO OUT 2)

Video 2 Rec Out

Analog 3 (AUDIO OUT 3)

Video 3 Rec Out

Analog 4 (AUDIO OUT 4)

Zone 2 Out

Analog 5 (AUDIO OUT 5)

Zone 3 Out

Opt 1 Out (DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1)

Tape 1 Rec Out

Opt 2 Out (DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 2)

Tape 2 Rec Out

Coax 1 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1) Video 1 Rec Out
Coax 2 Out (DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 2) Zone 2 Out

Speaker/Output Setup—Continued
Opt 1 Out, Opt 2 Out, Coax 1 Out, Coax 2 Out

Composite Video 1-3, S-Video 1-3

Specify a setting for “DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1-2”
and “DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL 1-2.”
You can select from Tape 1 Rec Out, Tape 2 Rec Out,
Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out, Video 3 Rec Out,
Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not Used.

This is a setting for the composite video output jacks
(VIDEO OUT 1-3) and S video output jacks (S VIDEO
OUT 1-3).
For Composite Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor
Out A, Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec
Out, Video 3 Rec Out, Zone 2 Out, Zone 3 Out, and Not
Used.
• You can set “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” only when
“Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” is selected from the
Audio Output Assign sub-menu.
For S Video 1-3, you can select from Monitor Out A,
Monitor Out B, Video 1 Rec Out, Video 2 Rec Out,
Video 3 Rec Out, and Not Used.
Example 1:
When the video port of a picture recording device (e.g.,
a VCR) with VIDEO 1 as an input source is connected
to VIDEO OUT 2, you should set “Composite Video 2”
to “Video 1 Rec Out.”
Example 2:
When you want to connect a TV set to VIDEO OUT 3
to watch it in main room A, set “Composite Video 3” to
“Monitor Out A.”
When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used.”

2
OUT

Example 1:
When input (REC) of an audio sound recording device
(e.g., an MD recorder) with TAPE 2 as an input source
is connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 1, set “Opt 1
Out” to “Tape 2 Rec Out.”
Example 2:
When input (IN) of a picture recording device (e.g., a
DVD recorder) with VIDEO 2 as an input source is
connected to DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL 2, set “Opt 2
Out” to “Video 2 Rec Out.”
When nothing is connected: Select “Not Used.”
HDMI Out
This sub-menu appears when the HDMI terminal board
[L] is inserted.
This setting allows you to enable/disable audio output
from the HDMI terminal. Use this setting when the
HDMI terminal of a TV is connected to the HDMI
terminal of the RDC-7.1 and you want to enable HDMI
audio output of the RDC-7.1 from the TV speakers.
Usually leave this setting to its default, “Disable.”
Disable (Default): Disables HDMI audio output.
Enable: Enables HDMI audio output.

Video Output Assign Sub-menu
This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]
and [I] is inserted.
This setting allocates video output jacks on the
RDC-7.1 to input (play) sources. The setting varies
depending on the connection conditions.
The RDC-7.1 is equipped with composite video output
jacks for four lines, and S video output jacks for four
lines.
1

4
OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

The default settings are as follows:
Terminals

Default input settings

Composite Video 1 (VIDEO OUT 1)

Monitor Out B

Composite Video 2 (VIDEO OUT 2)

Zone 2 Out

Composite Video 3 (VIDEO OUT 3)

Zone 3 Out

Composite Video 4 (VIDEO OUT 4)

Monitor Out A (fixed)

S-Video 1 (S VIDEO OUT 1)

Video 1 Rec Out

S-Video 2 (S VIDEO OUT 2)

Video 2 Rec Out

S-Video 3 (S VIDEO OUT 3)

Video 3 Rec Out

S-Video 4 (S VIDEO OUT 4)

Monitor Out A (fixed)

Composite Video 4, S-Video 4
The composite video output jacks (VIDEO OUT 4), and
S video output jacks (S VIDEO OUT 4) are fixed to
Monitor Out A, you cannot change this setting. You
should connect a TV set and a projector used in main
room A to VIDEO OUT 4 or S VIDEO OUT 4.

Input Setup
Items described here are set when you press the input source buttons.
The RDC-7.1 is equipped with several types of jacks in addition to the standard audio and video jacks, and multiple jacks
are provided for each type. You may freely assign input sources such as CD, PHONO, TUNER, TAPE 1, TAPE 2, and
VIDEO 1-6 to these jacks.
Moreover, you can preset a listening mode, specify names for display, adjust audio delays, correct the difference in the
volume level from other input sources, and set the 12V trigger.
In particular, please be careful when setting the input jacks. Please properly specify settings for correct selection of
pictures and audio to be played by referring to the information you wrote down in the Your System Setting booklet.
In the case of NET AUDIO, you can specify settings for the server (See page 99).
Settings defaults are as follows:
Audio Assign
Analog Audio Multichannel Digital Audio
Name of Terminal
to be Set
NET AUDIO

MULTI-CH
IN

DIGITAL IN

Composite
Video

i.LINK

VIDEO IN

S-Video

Component
Video

S VIDEO IN COMPONENT
VIDEO IN

HDMI
HDMI IN

Last

Opt 2

Last

PHONO

Phono

Last

TUNER

USA: Coax 6
Others: No

Last

TAPE 1

Opt 3

Last

TAPE 2

Coax 1

Last

DVD

Opt 1

RCA 1

HDMI 1

VIDEO 1

Coax 2

RCA 2

HDMI 2

VIDEO 2

Coax 3

RCA 3

Video

VIDEO 3

Opt 4

RCA 4/BNC

Video

VIDEO 4

Opt 5

Video

VIDEO 5

Coax 4

Video

VIDEO 6

Coax 5

Video

Input Selector

AUDIO IN

Video Assign
i.LINK

Setup Menu

OSD Indication

Note: Defaults may differ depending on your region or option board in use.
USA: USA and Canadian models

Input Setup—Continued
Follow procedures below to change any setting:

Press the [Input] button, and then roll the
scroll wheel to select the input source that
you want to set.

Press the scroll wheel, and then press the
[Setup] button.
The Main Menu appears onscreen.

Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input
Setup,” and then press the [Enter] button.
The sub-menu is displayed.
2.Input Setup
==Input:XXXXXX=======
1.Audio Assign
2.Video Assign
3.Listening Mode Preset
4.Character Edit
5.IntelliVolume
6.Delay
7.Picture Setting
8.12V Trigger Assign

Audio Assign Sub-menu (when input
is other than NET AUDIO)
Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an item
you want to set, and then use the [ ]/[ ]
buttons to set the desired value.
Other items should be selected in the same way.

Press the [Return] button.
The display returns to the sub-menu.

Repeat procedures 4-5 to set desired
items sequentially.
When all of the items are set, go to procedure 7.

Press the [Setup] button.
Settings are completed and the menu screen
disappears.

Hint:
When you perform the procedures on the RDC-7.1,
after selecting the input source using the input source
buttons, press the [Setup] button. Next, select the menu
you want to configure by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons
and press the [Enter] button to confirm the selection.
Then, after selecting the sub-menu you want to
configure by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons, select your
value by pressing the [ ]/[ ] buttons, and press the
[Enter] button to confirm the value. If you want to go
back to the previous operation, press the [Exit] button.
Example 1
In assignment of a DVD recorder to input of VIDEO 1,
when the analog audio input is connected to “VIDEO
1,” the digital audio to “COAXIAL 2,” and the video to
“S VIDEO 2” and “COMPONENT 2.”
1. Press the [Input] button, and then roll the scroll
wheel to select “VIDEO 1.”
2. Press the scroll wheel, and then press the [Setup]
button to display the Main Menu.
3. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Input Setup,”
and then press the [Enter] button.

4. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Audio Assign”
from the sub-menu, and then press the [Enter] button.
5. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Analog Audio,”
and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “1.”
6. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Digital Audio,”
and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Coax 2.”
7. Press the [Return] button to return to the sub-menu.
8. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Video Assign,”
and then press the [Enter] button.
9. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “S-Video,” and
then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “2.”
10. Use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select “Component
Video,” and then use the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
“RCA 2.”
11. Press the [Setup] button.
Setting is completed and the menu screen disappears.

The following are settings for audio. When input is
“NET AUDIO,” see the following page.
Analog Audio
The following are settings for analog audio output:
Phono: Select the device connected to “AUDIO IN
PH.”
1-9: Select the device connected to the jack of “AUDIO
IN 1-9.”
No: Select this when no device is connected.
Multichannel
This item appears when the multichannel terminal board
[E] is inserted. When the multichannel terminal board
contains a single set of multichannel terminals, available
options are “1” and “No.”
1: Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTICH IN 1.”
2: Select the device connected to the jack of “MULTICH IN 2.”
No (Default): Select this when no device is connected.
Surr Back Channel
This item appears when the multichannel terminal board
[E] is inserted.
The following are settings for “Multichannel 1” or
“Multichannel 2” described above, and cannot be
specified separately for each input source. For example,
when the input source is CD and “Surround Back
Channel” is set to “Not Used (5.1 ch)” for
“Multichannel 1,” switching the input source to DVD
and “Surround Back Channel” to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch)”
will also change “Surround Back Channel” associated
with CD to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch).”
Not Used (5.1 ch): Select this when not using the
surround back channel.

Input Setup—Continued

Subwoofer Sensitivity
This item appears when the multichannel terminal board
[E] is inserted.
The following are also settings for “Multichannel 1” or
“Multichannel 2” (cannot be specified separately for
each input source).
Some DVD decks output the LFE channel at 15 dB
lower than the other channels in the multichannel
output.
The level setting under the Level Calibration sub-menu
is applied to the analog and digital inputs as well as the
multichannel input. Therefore, in this setting, you can
set the optimum LFE channel level applied only to the
multichannel input.
You can select from 0 (Default), +5, +10 and +15 dB.
Digital Audio
The following are settings for digital audio output.
Opt 1-Opt 6: Select the device connected to “DIGITAL
IN OPTICAL 1-6.”
Coax 1-Coax 6: Select the device connected to
“DIGITAL IN COAXIAL 1-6.”
AES/EBU: Select the device connected to “DIGITAL
IN (BALANCED) AES/EBU.” The “AES/EBU” is
available when the board [E] equipped with AES/EBU
terminal is inserted.
No: Select this when no device is connected.
Digital Format
For digital connections, you can set the digital signals to
be detected preferentially. When “Digital Audio” is set
to “No” on the Audio Assign Sub-menu above, this item
is not displayed.
Auto: Automatically detects the format of input signals.
The signal format (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM, AAC,
etc.) used for the selected source is automatically
detected, and necessary decoding is performed.
DTS: Select for DTS decoding. You should select this if
you feel it takes too long to detect the signals when you
have selected “Auto,” or if you dislike noises caused by
CDs fast forwarding or rewinding.
If any sound other than DTS is input, there is no sound.
PCM: Select for PCM decoding. You should select this
if you dislike omission of the top of a subsequent tune
when you have selected “Auto.”
If any sound other than PCM is input, there is no sound.
Note:
When playing any DTS-type CD or LD, always select
“Auto” and “DTS.” Selecting “PCM” will cause noises.
i.LINK
This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal
board [A] is inserted.
When you connect multiple devices using the
i.LINK(AUDIO) interface, the device names in the
i.LINK connection appear and you can choose the input

device from them using the cursor ([ ]/[ ]) buttons.
The device selected here will be the preferred device
among the connected i.LINK(AUDIO) devices.
No: Select this when connected i.LINK(AUDIO)
devices are not selected as input devices.

Music Server Sub-menu (When input
is NET AUDIO)
This sub-menu appears when the ETHERNET terminal
board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.
Select Server
When input Music Server is selected from NET
AUDIO, you can specify a server to be connected (See
page 77).

Video Assign Sub-menu
The following are settings for video.
This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]
and [I] is inserted.

Setup Menu

SBL/SBR (7.1 ch) (Default): Select this when using
the surround back channel.

Composite Video
1-6: Select the device connected to the “VIDEO IN 16” jack.
Last: Select this when you want video signal from the
device you last selected to be output.
No: Select this when no device is connected.
S-Video
1-6: Select the device connected to the “S VIDEO IN 16” jack.
Last: Select this when you want video signal from the
device you last selected to be output.
No: Select this when no device is connected.
Component Video
RCA 1-4: Select the device connected to the
“COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1-4” jack. The “RCA 4” is
available when the video terminal board [J] contains the
RCA-type COMPONENT VIDEO IN 4 terminals.
BNC: Select the device connected to the “COMPONENT
VIDEO IN” BNC type jack. The “BNC” is available
when the video terminal board [J] contains the BNC-type
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals.
Last: Select this when you want video signal from the
device you last selected to be output.
No: Select this when no device is connected.
HDMI
This item appears when the HDMI terminal board [L] is
inserted.
1: Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 1”
jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the
HDMI IN 1 terminal will also be output to the HDMI
OUT terminal.

Input Setup—Continued
2: Select the device connected to the “HDMI IN 2”
jack. When selecting this, the video signal from the
HDMI IN 2 terminal will also be output to the HDMI
OUT terminal.
VIDEO: Select this when you want the video signal
such as Composite Video, S Video, and Component
Video to be output from the HDMI OUT terminal.
Last: Select this when you want video signal from the
device you last selected to be output.
No: Select this when no device is connected.

Listening Mode Preset Sub-menu
You can specify a listening mode you frequently use for
each input source.
When a picture you like and frequently watch is a
Dolby Digital source, for example, you may specify
“Dolby Digital,” and if a CD of classical music you are
fond of is a PCM source, you can specify “Pure Audio.”
Selecting “Last” will set the same listening mode as the
one you last specified for that source.
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not
Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the
option “PL IIx” is set to “PL II.”
• If “Surr L/R” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, you cannot select THX,
Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,
Studio-Mix, or TV Logic.
• If both of “Center” and “Surr L/R” are set to “Not
Used” on the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, you
cannot select THX, Mono Movie, Enhance,
Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch
Stereo, or Full Mono.
Analog/PCM
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
PCM signals from CDs and analog signals from records
and cassette tapes. This option can be set for Main B
and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo (Default), Mono, PL IIx/
NEO:6, THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full
Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
Dolby Digital
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
Dolby Digital signals. This option can be set for Main B
and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby Digital
(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full
Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

100

DTS
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
DTS signals. This option can be set for Main B and
Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DTS (Default),
THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,
Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,
Dolby VS, and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
AAC
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
AAC signals. This option can be set for Main B and
Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, AAC (Default),
THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,
Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,
Dolby VS, and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
i.LINK (IEEE1394):DVD-Audio
This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal
board [A] is inserted.
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
DVD-Audio on a device connected to the
i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, DVD-Audio
(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full
Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
i.LINK (IEEE1394):SACD
This item appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal
board [A] is inserted.
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
Super Audio CD on a device connected to the
i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, SACD (Default),
THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged,
Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono,
Dolby VS, and Last.
D.F.2ch
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
digital signals such as Dolby Digital recorded through
two channels. This option can be set for Main B and
Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:

Input Setup—Continued

D.F. Mono
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
digital signals such as Dolby Digital and AAC recorded
in monaural. This option can be set for Main B and
Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono (Default), Mono
Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix,
TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS, and
Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Character Edit Sub-menu
Character Display
Specify whether or not the name given to an input
source should be displayed.
No: The name given is not displayed. Only the name of
the input source is displayed.
Yes (Default): The name given is displayed when the
input source is replaced.
Character
When “Yes” is selected for “Character Display” above,
you can name the input source.
You are allowed to enter up to ten characters.
Carry out the following operations on the Character
Input screen:
123456789012345678901234
12-4.Character Input
2
Input:VIDEO3
3 b.Character
4
:
5
ABCDEFGHIJKLM
6
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
7
abcdefghijklm
8
nopqrstuvwxyz
9
0123456789-.’
0
()+*/=,:;!?_
1
2

D.F. Multiplex
Here, you can specify the listening mode for AAC
sound multiplex broadcasting (e.g., a bilingual
broadcast). This option can be set for Main B and Zone
2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex (Default),
Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra, Unplugged, StudioMix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full Mono, Dolby VS,
and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multiplex, Dolby VS, and Last.
Multichannel
This item appears when the multichannel terminal board
[E] is inserted.
Here, you can specify the listening mode for analog
multichannel connection.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, Multichannel
(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full
Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

Press the [ ] button to select
“Character,” and then press the [ ]
button to display the Character Input
screen.

Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons to
select characters you want to enter, and
then press the [Enter] button.

Repeat step 2 above to enter up to ten
characters.
If you have selected the wrong character:
Pressing [Return] moves the cursor back to the
previous character.
To change a character:
1. Press the [Enter] button (repeatedly) to locate
the cursor on the character to be corrected.
2. Press the [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the new
character, and then press the [Enter] button.
If the name is shorter than ten characters, enter
blanks to make the length of the name ten
characters.

Press the [Setup] button.
Setup is complete, and the menu screen disappears.

176.4/192 kHz
Here, you can specify the listening mode for playing
audio output signals at 192 kHz and 176.4 kHz such as
DVD-Audio. This option can be set for Main B and
Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
You can select from the listening modes listed below:
(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Last
(Zone2)
Direct, Stereo, Last

Setup Menu

(Main A/B)
Pure Audio, Direct, Stereo, Mono, PLIIx/NEO:6
(Default), THX, Mono Movie, Enhance, Orchestra,
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, TV Logic, All Ch Stereo, Full
Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.
(Zone 2)
Direct, Stereo, Mono, Dolby VS, and Last.

To erase all the characters entered:
At step 1 above, press the [ ] button instead of the [
button.

]

101

Input Setup—Continued
IntelliVolume Sub-menu
When multiple devices are connected to the RDC-7.1,
the volume may vary for a device even when volume
settings on the RDC-7.1 are identical.
Reducing the variance in the volume level will allow
you to enjoy sounds at the same volume level without
adjusting the volume control on the RDC-7.1.

12V Trigger Assign Sub-menu
When the 12V TRIGGER OUT jack on the RDC-7.1 is
connected to the 12V TRIGGER IN jack of a device,
you can specify the room where you are going to trigger
the device to turn on the power (for connection details,
see pages 47, 49).
The default settings are as follows:

IntelliVolume
Use the [ ] button when the volume is louder than
other devices, and the [ ] button when the volume is
quieter.
You can set at 0.5 dB intervals within a range from
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB. The default is 0.0 dB.

Delay Sub-menu
This section describes how to adjust the delay of
sounds.
A/V Sync
When the picture is not synchronized with the sound,
you can synchronize them using these settings. This
option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for
Main A.
You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from
0.0 ms to 300.0 ms.
Relative Delay - Center, Surr L/R, Surr Back
Our proprietary “Enhanced Special Positioning
Algorithm” (an extended three-dimensional positioning
algorithm) fine tunes the sound field. This algorithm is
able to create a maximum delay of 10 ms in the output
of each speaker. This delay is equivalent to a distance of
about 3 meters between speakers. This option can be set
for both Main A and Main B.
• When “Center” is set to “Not Used” on the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, there is no setting for
“Center.” Likewise, if “Surr L/R” is set to “Not
Used,” or “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front,”
or “Not Used,” there is also no setting for
corresponding speakers.
You can set at 0.1 ms intervals within a range from
–10.0 ms to +10.0 ms. The default is 0.0 ms.
Use this function to fine tune your surround
environment after setting the distance between speakers
(See page 93) and the volume level (See page 94).
Extending the distance between speakers (widening the
delay in time) will expand the sound field, while
reducing the distance (narrowing the delay) will make
the sound field sharper.

102

Room setting

Delay

Trigger A

Main

Trigger B

Zone 2

Trigger C

Zone 3

Trigger D

Off

Trigger E

Main

Trigger A-E
The following are settings for the 12V trigger jacks AE:
Off: Select when not using.
Main: Select when you want to power on a connected
device only used in the main room.
Zone 2: Select when you want to power on a connected
device only used in Zone 2.
Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a connected
device only used in Zone 3.
Main/Zone 2: Select when you want to power on a
connected device only used in the main room or Zone 2.
Main/Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a
connected device only used in the main room or Zone 3.
Zone 2/Zone 3: Select when you want to power on a
connected device only used in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Zone 2/Zone 3: Select when you want to power
on a connected device used in any area: main room,
Zone 2, or Zone 3.
A delay-E delay
When a 12V trigger-connected device is powered on, a
large amount of current may, depending on the device
type, flow instantaneously. To ease the effects of this
problem, you can set time interval differences for output
signals from the 12V Trigger.
Setting time interval differences may prevent
unnecessary noise (bubbling sounds).
0 sec: Select when not setting any difference.
1 sec: Select when setting output signals 1 second after
power on to the RDC-7.1.
2 sec: Select when setting output signals 2 seconds after
power on to the RDC-7.1.
3 sec: Select when setting output signals 3 seconds after
power on to the RDC-7.1.

Listening Mode Setup

Mono Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
Mono listening mode.
a. Re-EQ/Academy
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects
when you do not want to overemphasize the treble
sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Off (Default): The effects are not applied.
Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble
is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the
noise when the source contains emphasized treble
sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio
movie recorded onto videotape.
b. Input Channel
This option configures the output method when you
play the stereo input source in the Mono listening mode.
This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Auto L+R (Default): The same audio signals are output
from the left and right speakers.
Left: When you play an input source with different
languages recorded on each channel, the left channel is
output from the left and right speakers.
Right: When you play an input source where different
languages are recorded on each channel, the right
channel is output from the left and right speakers.
c. Output Speaker
This option configures the speakers to use when playing
the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the
speakers you want to use.
Center A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
center speaker configured to “Speaker A.”
Center B: Outputs the source only from the center
speaker configured to “Speaker B.”
Center A+B: Outputs the source from the center
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
Front L/R A: Outputs the source from the front
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
Front L/R B: Outputs the source from the front
speakers configured to “Speaker B.”
Front L/R A+B: Outputs the source from the front
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
Note that this option is not available when the front
speakers are in Bi-amp configuration.
• When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”
“Center B,” “Center A+B,” and “Front L/R A.”

• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and
“Front L/R A+B.” In this case, the default setting is
“Front L/R A.”
• When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”
“Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and “Front L/R A+B.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used”
and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.
d. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when playing
the source in the Mono listening mode. Select the terminal to
which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This
setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is
set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker B)
Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available options will
be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Setup Menu

This menu allows you to configure the listening mode
settings including audio effect and playback options.

Multiplex Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
D.F. Multiplex listening mode.
a. Re-EQ/Academy
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
or Academy effect is applied or not. Use these effects
when you do not want to overemphasize the treble
sound. This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Off (Default): The effects are not applied.
Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble
is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the
noise when the source contains emphasized treble
sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio
movie recorded onto videotape.

103

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
b. Multiplex Input Channel
This option allows you to select the preferred audio
channel when the input is the AAC/Dolby Digital sound
multiplex signal. This option can also be set for Zone 2.
The input channel setting made here will be applied to
all the listening modes for the Dolby Digital and AAC
input signal “1+1” sources.
Main (Default): The main channel is preferred for output.
Sub: The sub-channel is preferred for output.
Main+Sub: The main and sub-channel are output.
c. Output Speaker
This option configures the speakers to use when playing
the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode. Select
the speakers you want to use.
Center A: Outputs the source only from the center
speaker configured to “Speaker A.”
Center B: Outputs the source only from the center
speaker configured to “Speaker B.”
Center A+B: Outputs the source from the center
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
Front L/R A (Default): Outputs the source from the
front speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
Front L/R B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
Front L/R A+B: Outputs the source from the front
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
Note that this option is not available when the front
speakers are in Bi-amp configuration.
• When the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”
“Center B,” “Center A+B,” and “Front L/R A.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and
“Front L/R A+B.” In this case, the default setting is
“Front L/R A.”
• When the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, the available options will be “Center A,”
“Front L/R A,” “Front L/R B,” and “Front L/R A+B.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Center” is set to “Not Used”
and the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to an option
other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this setting will not be displayed.
d. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the D.F. Multiplex listening mode.
Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to
use is connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”

104

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Stereo Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
Stereo listening mode.
a. Re-EQ/Academy
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
or Academy effect is applied or not in the Stereo
listening mode. Use these effects when you do not want
to overemphasize the treble sound. This option can also
be set for Zone 2.
Off (Default): The effects are not applied.
Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble
is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the
noise when the source contains emphasized treble
sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio
movie recorded onto videotape.
b. Front Speaker
This option configures the speakers to use when playing
the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
c. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the Stereo listening mode. Select
the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is
connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option defaults to “A.”

Direct, Pure Audio Setup Sub-menu

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
Direct or Pure Audio listening mode.
a. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening
mode. Select the speakers you want to use. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to
“Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
b. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening
mode. Select the speaker you want to use. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to
“Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
c. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio
listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/
R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration submenu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

d. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio
listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr
Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”
is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting
will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and
“B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
e. Subwoofer

Setup Menu

A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the Direct or Pure Audio listening
mode. Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you
want to use is connected. This setting can be made when
the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other
than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an
option other than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, the available options will be “A” or “Not
Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Multichannel Input Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play an analog
multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super
Audio CD.
This sub-menu appears when the multichannel terminal
board [E] is inserted.
a. SB Mode (5ch)
This option selects the enhancement mode for playback
when you play a 5.1ch analog multichannel source as a
6.1 or higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The
surround back setting you select here will be applied to
all of the multichannel input signals.
• This option will not appear when the Surr Back
Channel setting in the Audio Assign sub-menu is set
to “SBL/SBR (7.1ch).”

105

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for
Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration submenu, this option will not be displayed.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PL IIx Movie (Default): Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1
or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie mode.
• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PL IIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.
Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.
b. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not when playing an analog
multichannel source such as DVD-Audio and Super
Audio CD. Use this effect when you do not want to
overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
c. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays an analog multi channel source such
as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
d. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays an analog multichannel source such
as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. Select the speaker
you want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

106

e. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when the RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVDAudio and Super Audio CD. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to use
when the RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVDAudio and Super Audio CD. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker
B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front,” or “Not
Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu differ, the available options will be “A” and
“B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
g. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when the
RDC-7.1 plays an input source such as DVD-Audio and
Super Audio CD. Select the terminal to which the
subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set
to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play DVD-Audio that is
input from the i.LINK(AUDIO) interface.
This sub-menu appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO)
terminal board [A] is inserted.
a. LFE Level
This option allows you to set the bass level for the
i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio listening mode. The
LFE level setting made here will be applied to all of the
i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signals. The
available settings are –∞ dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB.
The option defaults to “0.”
b. SB Mode (5ch)
Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you
play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source
through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you
select here will be applied to the
i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio input signal “*/2.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
mode.
• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.
Off (Default): Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.
c. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
d. Front Speaker

B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the speaker you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp

Setup Menu

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio Input
Setup Sub-menu

This option configures the surround speakers to use
when the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
g. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when
the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for
Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

This option configures the front speakers to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”

107

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
h. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when the
RDC-7.1 plays DVD-Audio. Select the terminal to
which the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This
setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer”
is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD Input Setup
Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a Super Audio CD
input from the i.LINK(AUDIO) interface.
This sub-menu appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO)
terminal board [A] is inserted.
a. LFE Level
This option allows you to set the bass level for the
i.LINK(IEEE1394): SACD listening mode. The LFE
level setting made here will be applied to all of the
i.LINK(IEEE1394): SACD input signals. The available
settings are –∞ dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The
option defaults to “0.”
b. SB Mode (5ch)
Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you
play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source
through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you
select here will be applied to the
i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD input signal “*/2.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
mode.
• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.

108

NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.
Off (Default): Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.
c. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
d. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the
speaker you want to use. This setting can be made when
the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when the RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select
the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when
the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for
Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when the
RDC-7.1 plays a Super Audio CD. Select the terminal
to which the subwoofer you want to use is connected.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A)
Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Not Used” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when
the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other
than “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu,
the available options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Dolby Digital Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
Dolby Digital listening mode.
a. LFE Level
This option allows you to set the bass level for the Dolby
Digital listening mode. The LFE level setting made here
will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input signals.
The available settings are –∞ dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0
dB. The option defaults to “0.” This option can also be
set for Zone 2.

retained and will return to “Off” after the RDC-7.1
enters the standby state. This option can also be set for
Zone 2.
Off: Disables the Late Night function.
Low: Narrows the volume range.
High: Narrows the volume range more than the “Low”
setting.
c. Dolby EX
This option configures the Dolby EX effect when
playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.
Auto: Automatically plays a source using the Dolby EX
mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital EX
identification signal. When this signal is not contained,
the setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied.
Manual: The setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied
regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identification signal.
d. SB Mode (5ch)
This option allows you to select the enhancement mode
for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or
higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The
surround back setting you select here will be applied to
the Dolby Digital input signal “*/2.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, this option will not be
displayed.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PLIIx Movie (Default): Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1
or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie mode.
• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.
Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

Setup Menu

g. Surr Bk Speaker

e. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.

b. Late Night
This option allows you to set how the Late Night
function works (See page 57). The setting you select
here will be applied to all of the Dolby Digital input
signals. Note that the Late Night setting will not be

109

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
f. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.
Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
g. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.
Select the speaker you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening
mode. Select the speakers you want to use. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to
“Main A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
i. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source in the Dolby Digital
listening mode. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr
Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”
is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting
will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”

110

B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
j. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Digital listening mode.
Select the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to
use is connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

DTS Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
DTS listening mode.
a. LFE Level
This option allows you to set the bass level for the DTS
listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be
applied to all of the DTS input signals. The available
settings are –∞ dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The
option defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for
Zone 2.
b. SB Mode (5ch)
This option allows you to select the enhancement mode
for playback when you play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or
higher channel source through the RDC-7.1. The
surround back setting you select here will be applied to
the DTS input signal “*/2.”
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.
NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6 mode.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PLIIx Movie: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie
mode.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

c. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
d. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the
speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the
speaker you want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source in the DTS listening mode.
Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source in the DTS listening mode.
Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However,
when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for
Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Subwoofer

Setup Menu

• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the DTS listening mode. Select the
terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is
connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

AAC Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
AAC listening mode.
a. LFE Level
This option allows you to set the bass level for the AAC
listening mode. The LFE level setting made here will be
applied to all of the AAC input signals. The available
settings are –∞ dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, and 0 dB. The option
defaults to “0.” This option can also be set for Zone 2.
b. SB Mode (5ch)
Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you
play a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source
through the RDC-7.1. The surround back setting you
select here will be applied to the AAC input signal “*/2.”

111

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, this option will not be displayed.
Dolby EX: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Digital EX mode.
PLIIx Movie (Default): Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1
or higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie mode.
• When you set the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting to
“Main A 1ch (SBL)” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu, you cannot select “PLIIx Movie.”
PLIIx Music: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
NEO:6: Plays a 5.1ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel
source using the DTS NEO:6NEO:6 mode.
Off: Plays an original 5.1ch source as it is.
c. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
d. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select
the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select
the speaker you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source in the AAC listening mode.

112

Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
g. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source in the AAC listening mode.
Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However,
when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for
Front” or “Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the AAC listening mode. Select
the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is
connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a 2ch input source
in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS NEO:6 listening
modes. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker A)
Center” or “(Speaker A) Surr Back” setting is set to an
option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
• When the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp
for Front” or “Not Used,” the PLII mode will be used
instead of the PLIIx mode.
a. Surr Mode (2ch)
Selects the enhancement mode for playback when you
play a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher channel source
through the RDC-7.1. The surround mode setting you
select here will be applied to the Analog/PCM and D.F.
2ch input signals.
• The option “NEO:6 Music” will be available when the
(Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
PLIIx Movie (Default): Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or
higher channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie mode.
PLIIx Music: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
mode.
PLIIx Game: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
mode.
NEO:6 Cinema: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the DTS NEO:6 Cinema mode.
NEO:6 Music: Plays a 2ch source as a 6.1 or higher
channel source using the DTS NEO:6 Music mode.
b. PLIIx Music Panorama
This option allows you to configure the panorama effect
during the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode. This effect
will expand the sound space horizontally.
On: The panorama effect is turned on.
Off (Default): The panorama effect is turned off.
c. PLIIx Music Dimension
This option allows you to change the entire sound space
location either forward or backward during the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music mode. The option defaults to “3.”
The value “3” locates the sound space to the center
position. If you select values between “2” and “0,” the
sound space moves backward. If you select values
between “4” and “6,” the sound space moves forward.
Tips:
When you feel the sound space is too expanded or that
there is too much surround effect, move the sound space
forward to obtain a better balance. When you feel the
sound space is just like a mono source or is too narrow,
move the sound space backward to obtain a better balance.

d. PLIIx Music Center Width
This option allows you to adjust the sound image width
which the center speaker covers during the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music mode. When you play the source in the
Dolby Pro Logic II mode and the center speaker is
connected to the RDC-7.1, the center channel signal is
output only from the center speaker (if the center
speaker is not connected, the center channel signal will
be equally divided into the left and right front speakers
to create a virtual center sound image). In this option,
adjust the output balance between the center and front
left/right speakers to determine the scale for the central
sound image. The available settings for this option are
between “0” and “7.” The default value is “3.”
e. NEO:6 Music Center Image
This setting can be made when the (Speaker A) Surr
Back setting is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
The DTS NEO:6 Music mode is a listening mode in
which an original 2ch source is played as a 6ch source.
In this mode, the signal for center channel will be
created from the signals deducted to some extent from
the left and right front channels. This option allows you
to configure how much the signals are deducted from
the left and right channels to produce the center channel
image. The available settings for this option are
between “0” and “5.” The default value is “2.”

Setup Menu

Dolby Pro Logic IIx/DTS NEO:6 (2ch
Input only) Setup Sub-menu

f. Re-EQ
This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
effect is applied or not. Use this effect when you do not
want to overemphasize the treble sound.
Off (Default): The effect is not applied.
On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble is
overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
g. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS
NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you want to
use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.

113

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
h. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS
NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speaker you want to
use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
i. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or
DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
j. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
or DTS NEO:6 listening modes. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the
“(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or
“Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
k. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx or DTS
NEO:6 listening modes. Select the terminal to which
the subwoofer you want to use is connected. This
setting can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer”
is set to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”

114

in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

THX Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you apply the THX effect in
the THX mode. The settings in this sub-menu can be
made when the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is set to
an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
a. Surround EX
This option configures the Surround EX effect.
Auto: Automatically plays a source using the Surround
EX mode when the source contains the Dolby Digital
EX identification signal. When the Dolby Digital EX
identification signal is not contained and the signal is
from the multichannel source, the setting of “SB Mode
(5ch)” is applied. When the signal is from the 2ch
source, the setting of “SB Mode (2ch)” is applied.
Manual: The setting of “SB Mode (5ch)” is applied
when the signal is from the multichannel source,
regardless of the Dolby Digital EX identification signal.
When the signal is from the 2ch source, the setting of
“SB Mode (2ch)” is applied.
b.THX Mode (5ch)
This option allows you to select which THX mode the
RDC-7.1 will use when applying the THX effect to the
signal. The THX Mode you select here will be given
preference over the SB Mode (5ch).
• When the (Speaker A) Surr Back setting is “Main A
1ch” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the
available options will be “THX Cinema” and
“SurroundEX.”
THX Cinema: This mode is suitable for theater movies
that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized
for playing in a large space such as a movie theater.
SurroundEX: The RDC-7.1 automatically enters the
THX Surround EX playback mode.
Ultra2 Cinema (Default): In this new mode for the
THX Ultra2, the RDC-7.1 plays a 5.1ch music or movie
as a 7.1 or higher channel source.
Music Mode: This new mode for the THX Ultra2 is
suitable for a music source. In this mode, the RDC-7.1
plays a 5.1ch music source as a 7.1 or higher channel
source.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued

c. THX Mode (2ch)
This option allows you to select which THX mode the
RDC-7.1 will use when applying the THX effect to the
signal.
THX Cinema: This mode is suitable for theater movies
that are recorded and edited so that they are optimized
for playing in a large space such as a movie theater.
Games Mode: In this new mode for the THX Ultra2,
the RDC-7.1 plays a 2ch game source as a 7.1 or higher
channel source.
d. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select
the speakers you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Front L/R” is set to “Main A” in
the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select
the speaker you want to use. This setting can be made
when the “(Speaker B) Center” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source with the THX effect applied.
Select the speakers you want to use. This setting can be
made when the “(Speaker B) Surr L/R” is set to “Main
A” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

g. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source with the THX effect
applied. Select the speakers you want to use. This
setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr Back”
is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration submenu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back” is
set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting
will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Subwoofer

Setup Menu

Games Mode: In this new mode for the THX Ultra2,
the RDC-7.1 plays a 5.1ch game source as a 7.1 or
higher channel source.

This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source with the THX effect applied. Select
the terminal to which the subwoofer you want to use is
connected. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than
“Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.
However, when the “(Speaker B) Subwoofer” is set to
an option other than “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, the available options will be
“A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Mono Movie Setup/Enhance Setup/
Orchestra Setup/Unplugged Setup/
Studio-Mix Setup/TV Logic Setup
Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the
IntegraRESEARCH original listening mode. The
settings in this sub-menu can be made when the
(Speaker A) Surr L/R setting is set to an option other
than “Not Used” in the Speaker Configuration submenu.

115

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
a. Front Effect
This option allows you to turn off the reverb for the
front speakers. This is useful when playing live material
that already contains live reverberation as the added
reverb simply blurs the original sound. When the Front
Effect is turned off, no reverb is added to the front left,
front right, and center speakers and the original
reverberation can be heard as it is.
On (Default): The Front Effect is turned on and the
reverb is added.
Off: The Front Effect is turned off.
b. Reverb Level
This option allows you to adjust the amount of reverb to
suit your listening environment, source material, and so
on. The available settings are Small, Mid, and Large.
The option defaults to “Mid.”
c. Reverb Time
This option allows you to adjust the reverb time to suit
your listening environment, source material, and so on.
The available settings are Short, Mid, and Long. The
option defaults to “Mid.”
d. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front
L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
e. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
f. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source. Select the speakers you want
to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)

116

Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
g. Surr Bk Speaker
This option configures the surround back speakers to use
when playing the source. Select the speakers you want to
use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Surr
Back” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker A) Surr Back”
is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or “Not Used,” this setting
will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
h. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source. Select the terminal to which the
subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set
to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

All Ch Stereo Setup/Full Mono Setup
Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the audio effect
and playback options when you play a source in the All
Ch Stereo or Full Mono listening modes. The settings in
this sub-menu can be made when the (Speaker A)
Center setting is set to an option other than “Not Used”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu.

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
a. Re-EQ/Academy

e. Surr Bk Speaker

This option allows you to configure whether the Re-EQ
or Academy effect is applied or not in the
IntegraRESEARCH original listening mode. Use these
effects when you do not want to overemphasize the
treble sound.
Off (Default): The effects are not applied.
Re-EQ On: Adjusts the soundtrack in which the treble
is overemphasized, so that the sound is optimized for
home theater.
Academy On: Lowers the treble level and filters the
noise when the source contains emphasized treble
sound and too much hiss, such as an old mono audio
movie recorded onto videotape.

This option configures the surround back speakers to
use when playing the source. Select the speakers you
want to use. This setting can be made when the
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” is set to “Main A” in the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu. However, when the
“(Speaker A) Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” or
“Not Used,” this setting will not be displayed.
• When the settings for “(Speaker A) Surr Back” and
“(Speaker B) Surr Back” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu differ, the available options
will be “A” and “B.”
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround back speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround back
speakers configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front L/
R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration submenu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
c. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
d. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source. Select the speakers you want
to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”

f. Subwoofer

Setup Menu

b. Front Speaker

This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source. Select the terminal to which the
subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set
to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.
A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.

Dolby Virtual Speaker Setup
Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to configure the playback
options when you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.
a. Mode (2ch or 3ch only)
This option allows you to configure the width of a virtual
sound image which is simulated using two or three
speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect.
Wide: The breadth of the sound image is emphasized.
Reference (Default): The general 5.1ch surround
sound is simulated.

117

Listening Mode Setup—Continued
b. Front Speaker
This option configures the front speakers to use when
playing the source. Select the speakers you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B) Front
L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the front speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.” Note that
this option is not available when the front speakers are
in Bi-amp configuration.
c. Center Speaker
This option configures the center speaker to use when
playing the source. Select the speaker you want to use.
This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Center” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker Configuration
sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the center speaker
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the center speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
d. Surr L/R Sp
This option configures the surround speakers to use
when playing the source. Select the speakers you want
to use. This setting can be made when the “(Speaker B)
Surr L/R” is set to “Main A” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu.
A (Default): Outputs the source from the surround
speakers configured to “Speaker A.”
B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker B.”
A+B: Outputs the source from the surround speakers
configured to “Speaker A” and “Speaker B.”
e. Subwoofer
This option configures the subwoofer to use when
playing the source. Select the terminal to which the
subwoofer you want to use is connected. This setting
can be made when the “(Speaker A) Subwoofer” is set
to an option other than “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu. However, when the “(Speaker
B) Subwoofer” is set to an option other than “Main A”
in the Speaker Configuration sub-menu, the available
options will be “A” or “Not Used.”
A (Default): Outputs the source only from the
subwoofer connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
A terminal.
B: Outputs the source only from the subwoofer
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminal.

118

A+B: Outputs the source from the subwoofers
connected to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT A and
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT B terminals.
Not Used: No subwoofers are used for playback.
In Zone 2, you can set the following options.
a. Mode
This option allows you to configure the width of a
virtual sound image which is simulated using two
speakers while you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker
effect.
Wide: The breadth of the sound image is emphasized.
Reference (Default): The general 5.1 ch surround
sound is simulated.
b. Decode (2ch)
This option allows you to select the decode mode before
the Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is applied.
Dolby Pro Logic II: The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect
is applied after the signal is decoded with Dolby Pro
Logic II.
DTS NEO:6: The Dolby Virtual Speaker effect is
applied after the signal is decoded with DTS NEO:6.

Dolby Headphone Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to enable/disable the Dolby
Headphone function when you use the headphones.
a. Mode
On (Default): Enables the Dolby Headphone function.
Off: Disables the Dolby Headphone function.

Audio Adjust
You can adjust bass, mid, and treble notes for each
speaker set.
• For any speaker set to “Not Used” in the Speaker
Configuration sub-menu, no associated setting item is
displayed.
Front Bass
Option for adjusting bass notes from front L/R
speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Front Mid
Option for adjusting mid notes from front L/R speakers.
Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Front Treble
Option for adjusting treble notes from front L/R
speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
This option can also be set for Zone 2.
Center Bass
Option for adjusting bass notes from the center speaker.
Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Surr Bk Bass
Option for adjusting bass notes from the surround back
speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from –12
dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not
displayed.
Surr Bk Mid
Option for adjusting mid notes from the surround back
speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from –12
dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not
displayed.
Surr Bk Treble
Option for adjusting treble notes from the surround
back speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
• If “Surr Back” is set to “Bi-Amp for Front” on the
Speaker Configuration sub-menu, this item is not
displayed.

Setup Menu

Tone Control Sub-menu

Subwoofer Bass
Option for adjusting bass notes from the subwoofer.
Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

Center Mid
Option for adjusting mid notes from the center speaker.
Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
Center Treble
Option for adjusting treble notes from the center
speaker. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
Surr L/R Bass
Option for adjusting bass notes from surround L/R
speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
Surr L/R Mid
Option for adjusting mid notes from surround L/R
speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”
Surr L/R Treble
Option for adjusting treble notes from surround L/R
speakers. Specify at 1 dB intervals in a range from
–12 dB to +12 dB. The default is “0.”

119

Preference
This menu allows you to configure the listening mode settings including audio effects and playback options.

Volume Setup Sub-menu
a. Volume Display
You can switch the volume indication between an
absolute value and a relative value.
Absolute (absolute value): Displayed in a range from 0
to 100.
Relative (relative value) (Default): Displayed in a
range of –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –80 dB......18.0 dB. An
absolute volume value of 82 is equivalent to a relative
volume value of 0 dB.

a. Component Video
Specify whether or not to display the On Screen Display
(OSD) on the screen, when both of the source device
and TV/projector are connected to the component video
terminals. This option can be set for both Main A and
Main B.
OSD On (Default): OSD is displayed.
OSD Off: OSD is not displayed.
b. Immediate Display

You can adjust the volume level of muted sounds.
Specify at 10 dB intervals in a range from – ∞ dB and
–50 dB to –10 dB. The default is “– ∞.” This option can
be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

Specify whether or not to display the description of
operations on the screen while you are operating the
RDC-7.1 (when the component video signal is output,
nothing is displayed if set to On). This option can be set
for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
On (Default): Displayed.
Off: Not displayed.

c. Maximum Volume

c. Display Position

You can set the maximum output volume level to
prevent sounds from becoming too loud. When
displaying in absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in
a range from 50.0 to 99.5. When displaying in relative
values, specify at 0.5 dB intervals in a range from
–32 dB to +17.5 dB. If you do not want to set any
specific value, leave this item “Off,” the default setting.
This option can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as
for Main A.

Specify the position where the Immediate Display
should be displayed. You can set in a range of ten
positions from Top to Bottom of the screen. By default,
it is displayed at the Bottom of the screen. This option
can be set for Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

b. Muting Level

d. Power On Volume
You can set a constant volume level of sounds output
when the RDC-7.1 is powered on. When displaying in
absolute values, specify at 0.5 intervals in a range from
0 to 100. When displaying in relative values, specify at
0.5 dB intervals in a range from – ∞ dB and –81.5 dB to
+18.0 dB (Max). If you want to maintain a selected
volume level setting when putting the apparatus into
standby status, select “Last.” This option can be set for
Main B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

Headphone Level Setup Sub-menu
a. Headphone Level
When the volume level differs between speakers and
headphones, you can, in advance, fine tune the
headphones volume. Adjust at 0.5 dB intervals in a
range from –12 dB to +12 dB.

OSD Setup Sub-menu
This sub-menu appears when the video terminal board
[H] and [I] is inserted.

120

d. Scan Mode
Specify whether or not to output the video signal with
interlace mode.
Interlaced: Outputs with interlace mode.
NonInterlaced: Does not output with interlace mode.
e. Net-Tune OSD Display
This item appears when the ETHERNET terminal board
[B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.
Specify whether or not to display a description of
operations on the screen when using Net-Tune (when
the component video signal is output, nothing is
displayed if set to On). This option can be set for Main
B and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.
On (Default): Displayed.
Off: Not displayed.

OSD Position Sub-menu
This sub-menu allows you to adjust the position of the
OSD Setup Menu as it is displayed on your screen. This
sub-menu appears when the video terminal board [H]
and [I] is inserted. Depending on the monitor used,
there may be cases where the OSD Setup Menu is not
displayed in the center and parts of the menus are cut
off. To adjust the position of the OSD Setup Menu,
simply press the cursor buttons to inch the menu to the
position you desire. This option can be set for Main B
and Zone 2 as well as for Main A.

i.LINK Setup
This menu can be used when connecting to an IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device.

Wakeup Setup
a. Wakeup on i.LINK (IEEE1394)
Specify connecting condition on standby of the
RDC-7.1.
Enable: To be left connected.
Disable (Default): To be disconnected while the
RDC-7.1 is on standby to save electricity.

for Zone 2, or it will be output in analog format when
any source is selected for Zone 2.
Enable: Enables the DVD Output for Zone 2 function.
Disable (Default): Disables the DVD Output for Zone
2 function.

OSD for DVD
a. OSD for DVD

Setup Menu

Even when a DVD player is directly connected to the
TV, the OSD screen of the RDC-7.1 can be displayed on
the TV monitor if the DVD player is an
IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready device. In
this case, use the i.LINK cable to connect the i.LINK
(AUDIO) terminal on the RDC-7.1 and i.LINK
(AUDIO) terminal on the DVD player.
Disable (Default): Select this to block OSD screen
display.
Left: Select this to display the OSD screen on the left
side of the TV monitor.
Right: Select this to display the OSD screen on the
right side of the TV monitor.
b. Select DVD
Select the name of the device that should display the
OSD screen using the [ ]/[ ] cursor buttons if
multiple IntegraRESEARCH i.LINK (AUDIO)-ready
devices are connected to the RDC-7.1. This item does
not appear when “Disable” is selected in the OSD for
DVD setting.

OSD for DVD (Zone 2)
When listening in Zone 2, the same setting as above is
available.

System Control Setup
a. i.LINK Selector Change
This menu allows you to enable/disable the i.LINK
Selector Change function. When an i.LINK (AUDIO)enable device is used to playback, this function switches
the input source to the one assigned to the device.
Enable: Enables the i.LINK Selector Change function.
Disable (Default): Disables the i.LINK Selector
Change function.
b. DVD Output for Zone 2
This option automatically switches the i.LINK Audio
Output of IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo’s DVD players.
With this function enabled, audio signals of SACD will
be output through i.LINK when no source is selected

121

Network Setup
This menu appears when the ETHERNET terminal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.
If using a broadband router (DHCP function), you need not perform “7. Network Setup” because the DHCP function
on the RDC-7.1 is defaulted to “Enable.” When the DHCP function for the broadband router is set to “Disable,” network
setup is required. In this case, you have to be knowledgeable about the network.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and Auto IP are the mechanisms that automatically perform network
settings such as IP address on a network device such as the RDC-7.1, a PC, and a broadband router.
DNS (Domain Name System) is the mechanism that converts a domain name, such as “www.jp.onkyo.com/” used to
browse a homepage, to an IP address such as “210.199.170.69” used in actual communications.

IP Address Sub-menu
a. DHCP Settings
Specify whether or not to set DHCP automatically.
Enable (Default): Enables the DHCP function.
Disable: Disables the DHCP function.
b. IP Address
Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”
When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is
connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the IP address
provided by your ISP. The IP address to be entered must
be in the following format. You cannot use the net audio
function with an IP address that is not in the following
format.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0–172.31.255.255
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0–192.168.255.255
c. SUBNET Mask
Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”
When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is
connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the subnet
mask provided by your ISP. The subnet mask is usually
“255.255.255.0.”
d. Gateway
Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”
When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is
connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the gateway
address provided by your ISP.
e. DNS Server 1, DNS Server 2
Specify if “Disable” is selected in “a. DHCP Settings.”
When an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is
connected directly to the RDC-7.1, enter the DNS
address provided by your ISP. If connected to a gateway
(router), enter the IP address of the gateway.
When you are informed of a single DNS address, enter
the address into “e. 1st.” If informed of two or more,
enter one into “f. 2nd.”

Proxy Sub-menu
Specify when connecting to the Internet via a proxy
server.
a. Proxy Server
Some ISPs (Internet service providers) use a proxy
server to connect to the Internet. In this case, follow the
written instructions from the provider to set the proxy.
Enable: Enables the proxy server function.
Disable (Default): Disables the proxy server function.
b. Proxy URL Input
Enter the domain name of the proxy server. When
“Disable” is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this
item and pressing the [Enter] button will put the
RDC-7.1 into the character entry mode. Press the [ ]/
[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons to select numerics, and then
press the [Enter] button. When all numerics are entered,
exit from the character entry mode.
c. Proxy Port
Enter the port No. of the proxy server. When “Disable”
is set for “a. Proxy Server,” selecting this item and
pressing the [Enter] button will put the RDC-7.1 into
the character entry mode. Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select numerics, and then press the [Enter]
button. When all numerics are entered, exit from the
character entry mode.
Note:
When the settings are complete, press the [Return]
button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select “→Save Settings,” and then
press the [ ] button to save settings. After setting,
saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data,
be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will
be lost.

MAC Address Sub-menu
a. MAC Address
Confirm the MAC address of your PC. You cannot
change the MAC address.

122

Client Sub-menu
While the system sending information is called a server,
the machine receiving the data is called a “client.”
Multiple clients can be connected to a single server.
From the viewpoint of Net-Tune Central, the RDC-7.1
is a client.
a. Client Name
Confirm the client name used on the Net-Tune system.
The client name is assigned by the RDC-7.1. You
cannot change the assigned name.
b. Wakeup on LAN

Lock/Version Setup
The following sub-menus allow you to lock your
settings or display the software version of the RDC-7.1.

Lock Setup Sub-menu
a. Lock
You can lock all of the setting menus to prevent settings
from being changed by mistake.
Locked: Powering on and off will resume the setting
when it was locked, discarding any modification that
was made after locking.
Unlocked (Default): No lock on setting operations.

Firmware Version Sub-menu

Specify the network condition on standby of the
RDC-7.1.
Enable: To be left connected.
Disable: To be disconnected while the RDC-7.1 is on
standby to save electricity.

This section deals with confirmation of the firmware
version for each program currently installed in your
RDC-7.1 (No procedure is provided for updating the
firmware).

c. NTSP Port

a. Master version

Specify the TCP/IP port to communicate with Net-Tune
Central. This setting is to determine the port for
intercommunication and needs to match the setting at
Net-Tune Central. Do not change the port number
unless absolutely necessary. Press the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ] buttons to select numerics, and then press the
[Enter] button. When all numerics are entered, exit from
the character entry mode.
Note:
When the settings are complete, press the [Return]
button to return to the Network Setup menu. Use the
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select “→ Save Settings,” and then
press the [ ] button to save settings described in
“Network Setup” on pages 122 and 123. After setting,
saving data will take a few seconds. While saving data,
be sure not to turn off the power, otherwise the data will
be lost.
Specifications:
Ethernet port: 10BASE-T
File type: MP3, WMA, WAV
(supports non-compression format and sampling
frequency of 32, 44.1, 48 kHz)
(WMA files with contents protected cannot be played)

Confirm the firmware version for the main program.

Setup Menu

Network Setup—Continued

b. i.LINK(IEEE1394) version
Confirm the firmware version for i.LINK. This item
appears when the i.LINK(AUDIO) terminal board [A] is
inserted.
c. Net-Tune version
Confirm the firmware version for the Net-Tune
program. This item appears when the ETHERNET
terminal board [B] (for Net Audio) is inserted.
d. HDMI version
Confirm the firmware version for HDMI. This item
appears when the HDMI terminal board [L] is inserted.

123

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products
Using the Remote Controller
The RC-554M/555M remote controller is a useful tool
that can operate not only the RDC-7.1, but also all the
other components of your home theater. To operate any
component other than the RDC-7.1 with the RC-554M/
555M remote controller, press the [Mode] button and use
the scroll wheel to select the component to operate.
Before operating a digital component including satellite
tuner, cable TV, VCR, and TV with the RC-554M/555M,
you need to program the remote control codes of the operated digital component into the RC-554M/555M.
There are two methods. One method is selecting the
name of a different brand from the table, entering the
setting number listed, and calling up the pre-programming code (See page 130). The other method is sending
the commands from the other brand’s remote control
directly into this remote controller (See page 136).

DVD Mode
DVD mode is used to control an IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo DVD player connected to the RDC-7.1 via
.
To select DVD mode, press the [Mode] button, and
then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the
display.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously
(when you enter the DVD mode, be sure that the LCD
display shows “DVD” in both of the top and bottom
lines).
Scroll wheel

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo
Products Using the

Connection
On

Connecting your
-compatible IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, DVD player, or cassette
recorder to the RDC-7.1 via
allows you to control
your system with the RDC-7.1’s remote controller by
pointing it at the RDC-7.1. Since you don’t have to enter
any special codes, or do any programming,
allows
you to control these components quickly and easily. See
page 45 for connection information.
Note:
To use the
function, you must make an
connection and an analog RCA/phono connection between the
AV component and your RDC-7.1, even if they are connected digitally.

Standby
TV

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer

Sleep

TV
Input

Top

M en

rv
Se

Point the remote controller toward the
front panel of the RDC-7.1, and press the
appropriate buttons for your operation.

VOL

E xi

Roll the scroll wheel to select your favorite mode.
• When operating the IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo DVD player, select “DVD.”
• When operating the Onkyo CD player, select
“CD.”
• When operating the Onkyo MD player, select
“MD.”
• When operating the Onkyo cassette tape deck,
press the scroll wheel to display “AMP.”

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Press the [Mode] button.

Prev
CH

turn

ide

Setu

Display

Muting

Rec

Main A

Main B

Random

Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Direct

Pure A

Angle Last Memory

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Ar tist

Location

RC-554M
RC-555M

124

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Input

Genre

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote
Controller—Continued
F Repeat button

This button is used to turn on the DVD player.

2 Standby button
This button is used to set the DVD player to Standby.

3 Number/letter buttons
These buttons are used to enter title, chapter, and
track numbers and to enter times for locating specific points in time.

4 Mode button
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,
and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears
on the display.

5 Top Menu button
This button is used to select a DVD’s top menu.

6 Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &
Enter buttons
These buttons are used to navigate DVD menus and
the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus. The
[Enter] button is used to start playback of the
selected menu title, chapter, or track and to confirm
settings.

7 CH/Disc +/– button
This button is used to select discs on a DVD changer.

8 Return/Exit button

9 Display button

This button is used to set the A–B repeat playback
function.

H Open/Close [ ] button
This button is used to open and close the disc tray.

I LIGHT button
This button is used to turn on or off the remote controller’s illuminated buttons.

J Clear button
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear
entered numbers.

K Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
“DVD” appears on the display.

L Menu button
This button is used to select a DVD’s menu.

M VOL

button
This button is used to set the volume of the
RDC-7.1.

This button is used to access the DVD player’s
onscreen setup menus.

O Muting button

This button is used to display information about the
current disc, title, chapter, or track, including the
elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on.

0 Previous/Next [

]/[

] buttons

The Previous [
] button is used to select the previous chapter or track. During playback it selects
the beginning of the current chapter or track. The
Next [
] button is used to select the next chapter
or track.
]/[

G A-B button

N Setup/Guide button

This button is used to exit the DVD player’s
onscreen setup menu and to restart menu playback.

A FR/FF [

This button is used to set the repeat playback functions.

] buttons

The FR [

] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [

] button is used to start fast forward.

B Pause [ ] button
This button is used to pause DVD playback.

C Step/Slow [

]/[
] buttons
These buttons are used for frame-by-frame playback and slow-motion playback.

D Subtitle button
This button is used to select subtitles.

E Audio button
This button is used to select foreign language
soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital
or DTS).

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

P Play [

] button
This button is used to start DVD playback.

Q Stop [ ] button
This button is used to stop DVD playback.

R Random button
This button is used with the random playback function.

S Angle button
This button is used to select different camera angles.

T Last Memory button
This button is used with the last memory function,
which allows you to resume DVD playback from
where you left off.

U Memory button
This button is used with the memory playback function, which allows you to create a custom playlist of
titles, chapters, or tracks.

V Search button
This button is used to search for titles, chapters,
tracks, and specific points in time.

125

Using the Remote Controller

1 On button

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—
Continued
Boxed numbers are for MiniDisc mode (See page 127).

CD Mode
CD mode is used to control an Onkyo CD player connected to the RDC-7.1 via
. To select CD mode,
press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll
wheel until “CD” appears on the display.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously
(when you enter the CD mode, be sure that the LCD
display shows “CD” in both of the top and bottom
lines).

1 On button
This button is used to set the CD player to On or
Standby.

2 Number/letter buttons
These buttons are used to enter track numbers.

3 Mode button
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,
and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on
the display.

4 CH/Disc +/– button
This button is used to select discs on a CD changer.

Scroll wheel

5 Display button
This button is used to display information about the
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,
remaining time, total time, and so on.

6 Previous/Next [

Standby
TV

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

+10

WXYZ

] buttons

The Previous [
] button is used to select the previous track. During playback it selects the beginning of the current track. The Next [
used to select the next track.

] button is

T V VOL

7 FR/FF [

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

--/---

]/[

Input

Custom

]/[

] buttons

The FR [

] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [

] button is used to start fast forward.

Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Sleep

Dimmer
TV
Input

rv
Se

Aud
io

VOL

E xi

Prev
CH

Enter

Disc

turn

This button is used to set the repeat playback functions.

0 Open/Close [ ] button

ide

S etu

This button is used to pause CD playback.

9 Repeat button

Men
u

en
pM

8 Pause [ ] button

Display

This button is used to open and close the disc tray.
Muting

A LIGHT button
Rec

Main A

Main B

Random

This button is used to turn on or off the remote controller’s illuminated buttons.

B Clear button
Audio

Subtitle

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

Angle Last Memory

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

This button is used to cancel functions and to clear
entered numbers.

C Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
“CD” appears on the display.

D VOL
RC-554M
RC-555M

button
This button is used to set the volume of the
RDC-7.1.

E Muting button
This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

126

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—
Continued
F Play [

] button
This button is used to start CD playback.

8 Rec [●] button
This button is used to start MiniDisc recording.

9 Repeat button

G Stop [ ] button
This button is used to stop CD playback.

H Random button
This button is used with the random playback function.

This button is used to set the repeat playback functions.

0 Eject [ ] button
This button is used to set eject the MiniDisc.

A LIGHT button

I Memory button
This button is used with the memory playback function, which allows you to create a custom playlist of
tracks.

This button is used to turn on or off the remote controller’s illuminated buttons.

B Clear button
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear
entered numbers.

MiniDisc mode is used to control an Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder connected to the RDC-7.1 via
. To select
MiniDisc mode, press the [Mode] button, and then
roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the display.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously
(when you select “TAPE2” as the top line, “MD”
appears in the bottom line.)

1 On button
This button is used to set the MiniDisc recorder to
On or Standby.

C Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
“TAPE2” appears on the display.

D VOL

button
This button is used to set the volume of the
RDC-7.1.

E Muting button
This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

F Play [

] button
This button is used to start MiniDisc playback.

G Stop [ ] button
This button is used to stop MiniDisc playback.

2 Number/letter buttons
These buttons are used to enter track numbers and
to enter times for locating specific points in time.

3 Mode button
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,
and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears
on the display.

H Random button
This button is used with the random playback function.

I Memory button
This button is used with the memory playback function, which allows you to create a custom playlist of
tracks.

4 Display button
This button is used to display information about the
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,
remaining time, total time, and so on.

5 Previous/Next [

]/[

] buttons

The Previous [
] button is used to select the previous track. During playback it selects the beginning of the current track. The Next [
used to select the next track.

6 FR/FF [

]/[

] button is

]buttons

The FR [

] button is used to start fast reverse.

The FF [

] button is used to start fast forward.

7 Pause [ ] button
This button is used to pause MiniDisc playback.

127

Using the Remote Controller

MiniDisc Mode

Operating IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo Products Using the Remote Controller—
Continued
1 Mode button

Tape Mode
Tape mode is used to control an Onkyo cassette
recorder connected to the RDC-7.1 via
. To select
Tape mode, press the scroll wheel, placing your
remote controller into “AMP” mode.
Note:
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously
(when you select “TAPE1” as the top line, “AMP”
appears in the bottom line.).
Scroll wheel

This button is used with the scroll wheel to select
the remote controller modes. Press the scroll wheel
until “AMP” appears on the display.

2 Previous/Next [

3 Rewind/FF [

TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

T V VOL

Clear
#
Direct Tuning

Custom
Zone 3

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer

Sleep
Top

rv
Se

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

VOL

E xi

Prev
CH

turn

] buttons

] button is used to start rewind.

] button is used to start fast forward.

ide

Setu

5 LIGHT button
This button is used to turn on or off the remote controller’s illuminated buttons.

6 Input button
This button is used to select the input source. Press
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until
“TAPE1” appears on the display.

7 VOL

button
This button is used to set the volume of the
RDC-7.1.

This button is used to mute the RDC-7.1. This function can be set only with the remote controller.

8 Play [

Display

This button is used to start tape recording.

8 Muting button

A
DJ

M en

]/[

4 Rec [●] button

Standby
I

TV
Input

] button is

The Previous/Next [
]/[
] buttons may not
work properly with some cassette tapes depending
on how they were recorded.

The FF [

--/---

] buttons

ning of the current track. The Next [
used to select the next track.

The Rewind [

]/[

The Previous [
] button is used to select the previous track. During playback it selects the begin-

Muting

] button
This button is used to start tape playback.

0 Stop [ ] button
This button is used to stop tape playback.
Main A

Main B

Audio

Subtitle

Angle Last Memory

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Playlist

Album

Ar tist

Genre

Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Delete

Language

Location

Caps

RC-554M
RC-555M

128

Random

Rec

A Reverse Play [

] button
This button is used to start reverse playback.

Using the Remote Controller with Other
Components
You can use the RDC-7.1’s remote controller (RC554M/555M) to control your other AV components,
including those made by other manufacturers. To do this
you can:
• Enter a remote control code for the component that
you want to control (e.g., DVD, TV, VCR).
• Learn commands directly from the other component’s
remote controller (see page 136).
• Use the Macro function to learn a sequence of actions
(see page 137).

5
1

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

Use the number buttons to enter
the 4-digit remote control code.

If the code is accepted, the following
appears on the display for a while, and
then the normal display reappears.

Entering a Remote Control Code
By entering the appropriate remote control code for
each of your components, you can control each component by selecting the relevant remote controller mode:
DVD, TV, VCR, CBL (cable), or SAT (satellite).

2
Custom

Look up the appropriate remote
control code for the component.
See “Remote Control Codes” on pages
130-133.
Press and hold down the [Custom]
button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.
Roll the scroll wheel to select
“PRGRM,” and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
the remote controller mode you
want to use with the component,
and then press the scroll wheel.
The following remote controller modes
can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,
or SAT.

Using the Remote Controller

If the code is not accepted, after the
message “RETRY” has been displayed,
the code entry display reappears, and
you should try entering the code again.
To cancel this procedure at any point,
press the [Custom] button.
Select the remote controller mode,
point the remote controller at the
component, and check its operation.
The remote controller buttons that can
be used in DVD mode are shown on
page 124. Those that can be used with
the TV, VCR, CBL, and SAT modes are
listed on pages 134 and 135.

Remote Control Codes for an
IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD player
The remote control code that you use with an
IntegraRESEARCH/Onkyo DVD player depends on
whether it’s connected via
, as follows:
5001: Use this code if you’ve connected an
cable
and an RCA/phono analog audio connection cable to
your DVD player. This is the default setting, so if
you’re using
, you don’t need to change it. Point
the remote controller at the RDC-7.1 to operate the
DVD player.
5002: Use this code if your DVD player doesn’t have
an
socket, or you’re not using
. Point the
remote controller at the DVD player to operate it.

129

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes
When two or more codes are given,
try each one in turn, and choose the
one that works best.

SAT (satellite tuner)

Manufacturer

Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Daewoo

4016, 4017, 4025

Oceanic

4022

Diamond

4022

Octagon

4016, 4017

Dishnet

4008

Okano

4013

Dual

4016

Optex

4015, 4023

DVD (DVD player)

Echostar

4010, 4018, 4025

Orbit

4016

Manufacturer

Control code

Einhell

4013, 4017, 4025

Orbitech

4017, 4019

Aiwa

5010

Elta

4015, 4017

Pace

4012, 4026, 4031

Akai

5019

Engel

4025

Pacific

4022

Apex

5015, 5016

Eurosat

4013, 4022

Palladium

4013, 4017, 4021

CyberHome

5027

Eurosky

4013, 4024

Palsat

4019

Denon

5017, 5020

Eurostar

4024

Panasonic

4006, 4031

5003

Fagor

4015, 4023

Panda

4024

Hitachi

5009

Ferguson

4012

Philips

4021, 4029

Integra

5001, 5002

Fidelity

4030

Phonotrend

4015, 4023

Integra Research

5001, 5002

Fracarro

4017

Predki

4017

JVC

5023

FTE

4025, 4030

Premier

4023

Kenwood

5017

Fuba

4017

Primestar

4007

Magnavox

5004, 5021

Galaxis

4015, 4023

Proscan

4001, 4002

Marantz

5025, 5026

4001, 4002

Protek

4022

Mitsubishi

5005

General Instruments

4003

Pye

4021

Onkyo

5001, 5002

GMI

4013

Quelle

4024

Panasonic

5011, 5017, 5020

Grundig

4021, 4029, 4031

Radix

4035

Philips

5004, 5021, 5028

Hinari

4017

RCA

4001, 4002

Pioneer

5006

Hirschmann

4019, 4035

Roadster

4025

Proscan

5003

Hitachi

4036, 4037

Rover

4025

RCA

5003

4011

Saba

Sanyo

5012

Hughes Network
Systems

4014, 4020, 4024,
4027

5007, 5013, 5018,
5029

Huth

4013, 4015, 4024

Samsung

4017

Sony

Imperial

4014

Satcom

4024

Technics

5020

Intertronic

4013

SatPartner

Thomson

5022, 5024

Intervision

4015, 4023, 4024

4017, 4020, 4027,
4030

Toshiba

5008, 5021

Johansson

4015

Schneider

4029

Xbox

5022

JVC

4009, 4021

Yamaha

5020

Kathrein

4025

Zenith

5014, 5021

Kolon

4017

K-SAT

130

4025

SAT (satellite tuner)

Kyostar

4017

Manufacturer

Control code

Lasat

4013, 4020, 4024

Alba

4014, 4017, 4025,
4027

Allsat

4015, 4027

Lenco

4016, 4017, 4025

Lennox

4023

Loewe

4013

Alltech

4022, 4025

Lorenzen

4024

Amstrad

4013, 4019, 4025,
4030, 4031

Macab

4022

Anglo

4025

Ankaro

4025

Anttron

4017

Apollo

4017

Arcon

4016

Armstrong

4013

Asat

4016

Astra

4013, 4016, 4024

Astro

4019, 4020

AudioTon

4015

Bush

4012, 4014

Condor

Manhattan

4015, 4020, 4023

Maspro

4021, 4025

Matsui

4021

Mediamarkt

4013

Medion

4025

Metronic

4013, 4017, 4020

Micro Technology

4025

Minerva

4021

Morgan’s

4013, 4015, 4025

Sedea Electronique

4017

Seemann

4013

SEG

4017, 4028

Seleco

4015, 4023

Skymaster

4025, 4034

Skyvision

4015

Sony

4005, 4031

Strong

4016, 4017, 4020

Sunstar

4013

Techniland

4015, 4023

TechniSat

4019

Teco

4013, 4016

Teleciel

4027

Telefunken

4017

Teleka

4013

Telemaster

4020

Telewire

4015, 4023

Tensai

4016

Thomson

4024, 4025

Thorens

4022

Tonna

4015, 4023, 4025

Toshiba

4004

Triasat

4019

Mysat

4025

Neuhaus

4019, 4023, 4024,
4025

4024

Neusat

4025

Tristar

4016

Conrad

4024

Nikko

4013, 4025, 4027

Unisat

4013

Cosat

4015, 4023

Nokia

4033

Crown

4013

Nordmende

4017, 4020

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
VCR

Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Universum

4021, 4024

Aiwa

2012, 2046, 2047

Jensen

2013

Vortec

4017

Akai

2003, 2004, 2022

JVC

Wela

4025

Zehnder

4020

2033, 2041, 2044, 2045,
2047

2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,
2032, 2035, 2040, 2048

Alba

Kaisui

2033

Zenith

4032

Anitech

2033

Kendo

2041, 2046

ASA

2034

Kenwood

2005, 2006, 2007, 2009

Baird

2036

Kodak

2010

Bell & Howell

2007

Loewe

2028, 2034

Blaupunkt

2039, 2042

Logik

2028, 2043

Bush

2033, 2041, 2044, 2045,
2047

Luxor

2030, 2031, 2036

Magnavox

2010, 2011, 2014, 2019,
2020

Marantz

2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,
2010, 2014, 2031, 2034

Matsui

2028, 2041, 2046, 2047

CBL (cable receiver)
Manufacturer

Control code

ABC

3001, 3002, 3021

Archer

3006

VCR

Cabletime

3028, 3032

Canon

Cableview

3004

Carver

2014

Contec

3009

Cimline

2033

Eastern

3010

Citizen

2008, 2009

3001, 3002

Colortyme

2005

Gemini

3011

Craig

2008

General Instruments

3002, 3022

Crown

2033

Grundig

3031

Curtis Mathes

Hamlin

3012

2001, 2005, 2008, 2009,
2010, 2011, 2023, 2026

Hitachi

3002

Cyrus

2034
2012

Jerrold

3002, 3011, 3013, 3021,
3022, 3023, 3026

Daewoo
Dansai

2033

Magnavox

3014

Decca

2034

Memorex

3015

Dimensia

2001, 2026

Movie Time

3016

Dumont

2034, 2036, 2037

NEC

3003

Elcatech

2033

Nokia

3033

Emerson

2003, 2010, 2012, 2022

NSC

3016

ESC

2043

Oak

3009

Ferguson

2035

Panasonic

3020

Finlandia

2034, 2036

Philips

3007, 3008, 3014

Finlux

2034, 2036, 2037

Pioneer

3017, 3024

Firstline

2033, 2041

Proscan

3001, 3002

Fisher

2007, 2030, 2036

RCA

3004, 3020, 3022

Fuji

2004, 2010, 2024

Realistic

3006

Funai

2012

Sagem

3034

Garrard

2012

Salora

3029

Samsung

3017

2001, 2002, 2008, 2010,
2011, 2023, 2025, 2026

Signature

3002

GEC

2034

Sprucer

3020

GoldHand

2033

GoldStar

2005, 2009

Goodmans

2031, 2033

2010, 2011

Matsushita

2010

Memorex

2007, 2008, 2010, 2012,
2019, 2030, 2036

Metz

2039

MGA

2022

Minerva

2039

Minolta

2013, 2021

Mitsubishi

2013, 2022, 2032, 2034

Motorola

2010

MTC

2008

Multitech

2008, 2012, 2033

NEC

2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,
2032

Neckermann

2034

Nesco

2033

NOBLEX

2008

Nokia

2030, 2036, 2043

Nordmende

2048

Okano

2046

Olympus

2010

Optonica

2017

Orion

2028, 2041, 2045, 2046,
2047

Osaki

2033

Otto Versand

2034

Palladium

2033

Panasonic

2010, 2011, 2042

Pentax

2013, 2021, 2025, 2037

Standard
Component

3018

Starcom

3011, 3021

Gradiente

2012

Stargate

3011

Graetz

2036, 2043

Tele+1

3030

Granada

2030, 2034, 2036

Tocom

3013

Grandin

2033

Phonola

2034

United Cable

3021, 3023

Grundig

Pioneer

2006, 2013, 2032, 2034

Universal

3005, 3006

2029, 2033, 2034, 2039,
2040, 2042, 2044

Proline

2044

Videoway

3025

Harman Kardon

2005

Proscan

2001, 2002, 2026

View Star

3009, 3014, 3016

HCM

2033, 2044

Pye

2034

Zenith

3019

Hinari

2028, 2033, 2043, 2044,
2047

Quasar

2010, 2011

Quelle

2034

Hitachi

2013, 2021, 2025, 2028,
2037, 2038, 2043

Ingersol

2028

Interfunk

2034

ITT

2030, 2036, 2043, 2048

JC Penney

2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2010, 2011, 2013, 2014,
2021

Pentex Research

2009

Philco

2010, 2011, 2014

Philips

2010, 2014, 2017, 2034,
2048

Radio Shack

2017

Radio Shack/
Realistic

2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,
2012, 2017

Radiola

2034

Using the Remote Controller

SAT (satellite tuner)
Manufacturer

131

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
VCR

TV
Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Admiral

1026, 1040, 1062

RCA

2001, 2002, 2003, 2008,
2010, 2013, 2021, 2023,
2025, 2026, 2027

Akai

1002, 1067

Akura

1045

Alba

1035, 1043

Realistic

2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,
2012, 2017

Rex

2048

Amplivision

1063

Roadstar

2033, 2043

Amstrad

1035, 1067

Runco

2019

Amtron

1009

Saba

2040, 2048

Anam National

1003, 1009

Saisho

2028, 2041

Anitech

1035

Salora

2030

AOC

1004, 1005, 1006

Samsung

2008, 2043, 2049

Arc en Ciel

1066

Sansui

2006, 2032

Arcam

1063

Sanyo

2007, 2008, 2030, 2036

ASA

1040

Saville

2047

Audiovox

1009

SBR

2034

Autovox

1040, 1068

Schaub Lorenz

2036

Baird

1069

Schneider

2033, 2034

Bang & Olufsen

1040

Scott

2015

Baur

Sears

2007, 2010, 2013, 2021

1036, 1054, 1055, 1058,
1059, 1068

SEG

2043

SEI

2028, 2034

Sharp

2016, 2017, 2031

Shintom

2004, 2033, 2036

Shorai

2028

Siemens

2034, 2036, 2039

Singer

2010

Sinudyne

2028, 2034

Sonolor

2030, 2031

Sony

2004, 2018, 2024

STS

2010, 2021

Beko

1052

Bell & Howell

1010, 1017

Binatone

1063

Blaupunkt

1041, 1042, 1044, 1058,
1059

Boots

1063

Brionvega

1040

Bruns

1040

BSR

1048

Bush

1035, 1043, 1048, 1050,
1053, 1057

Cascade

1035

Sunkai

2046

Celebrity

1002

Sylvania

2010, 2011, 2012, 2014

Century

1040

Symphonic

2012

Tandy

2007

Tatung

2034

Teac

2012

Technics

2010, 2042

Teknika

2010, 2012

Telefunken

2048

Thomson

2048

Thorn

2035, 2036

Toshiba

2013, 2015, 2022, 2034,
2048

Totevision

2008

Uher

2043

Unitech

2008

Universum

2034, 2039, 2043

Vector Research

2005, 2006

Video Concepts

2005, 2006, 2022

Wards

2008, 2010, 2012, 2013,
2017, 2021, 2027

XR-1000

2010, 2012

Yamaha

2005, 2006, 2007, 2009

Yoko

2043

Zenith

2004, 2019, 2024

Cimline

1035, 1043

Citizen

1004, 1006, 1009, 1017,
1022, 1025

Clatronic

1052

Colortyme

1004, 1006

Condor

1052

Contec

1035

Contec/Cony

1007, 1009

Continental Edison

1066

Craig

1009

Crosley

1040

Crown

1009, 1014, 1035, 1052

Curtis Mathes
Daewoo

Manufacturer

Control code

Emerson

1004, 1006, 1007, 1009,
1010, 1017, 1025, 1027,
1029, 1033, 1040, 1070

Envision

1004, 1006

Erres

1037

Europhon

1067

Fidelity

1068

Finlux

1039, 1040, 1067

Firstline

1035, 1043, 1048, 1049,
1063

Fisher

1010, 1017, 1052, 1063,
1068

Formenti

1040

Frontech

1045, 1062

Fujitsu

1070

Funai

1009, 1045, 1048, 1070

1001, 1003, 1004, 1006,
1011, 1012, 1019, 1034

GEC

1038, 1063, 1067, 1069

Geloso

1035

Genexxa

1062

GoldStar

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1008, 1025, 1047, 1063

Goodmans

1043, 1053, 1063

Gorenje

1052

Graetz

1062, 1069

Granada

1063, 1067

Grundig

1039, 1041, 1042, 1058,
1059, 1064

Hallmark

1004, 1006

Hanseatic

1060, 1068

Hantarex

1067

HCM

1035

Hinari

1035, 1043

Hitachi

1004, 1006, 1007, 1013,
1027, 1038, 1062, 1063,
1069

Huanyu

1053

ICE

1045, 1063

Imperial

1052

Infinity

1014

Inno Hit

1056, 1067

Interfunk

1055, 1062, 1066, 1069

Intervision

1045, 1063

ITT

1062, 1068, 1069

JBL

1014

1001, 1004, 1006, 1010,
1017, 1022, 1025, 1034

JC Penney

1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1011, 1012, 1016, 1019,
1022, 1025, 1034

1004, 1005, 1006, 1025,
1035, 1053

Jensen

1004, 1006

JVC

1007, 1012, 1013, 1015,
1033

Daytron

1004, 1006, 1025, 1035

Decca

1067

Kaisui

1035, 1063

Dimensia

1001, 1034

Kapsch

1062, 1069

Dixi

1035

Kathrein

1060

Dual

1057, 1068

Kawasho

1002, 1004, 1006

Dumont

1004, 1039, 1040

Kendo

1043

Electroband

1002

Kenwood

1004, 1006, 1008

Electrohome

1002, 1003, 1004, 1006,
1008

Kloss Novabeam

1009

Korting

1040

KTV

1009, 1025

1005

Elta

132

Manufacturer

1035

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
TV

Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Manufacturer

Control code

Loewe

1014, 1040, 1055

Quasar

1003, 1012, 1031

Techwood

1004, 1006, 1012

Quelle

1036, 1039, 1054, 1055,
1058, 1059, 1068

Teknika

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1009, 1022, 1025, 1031,
1070

Teleavia

1066

Telecaption

1024

Luxman

1004, 1006

LXI

1001, 1006, 1010, 1014,
1016, 1017, 1034

M Electronic

1035, 1053, 1062, 1063

Magnadyne

1040, 1067, 1068

Magnafon

1067

Magnavox

1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,
1018, 1020

Radio Shack

1010, 1017, 1034

Radio Shack/
Realistic

1001, 1004, 1006, 1007,
1009, 1010, 1017, 1021,
1025

Radiola

1037

Radiomarelli

1040, 1067

Marantz

1004, 1006, 1014, 1060

RCA

1001, 1003, 1004, 1005,
1006, 1008, 1027, 1034

Matsui

1035, 1043, 1048, 1050,
1063, 1064, 1067, 1068

Realistic

1010, 1017, 1034

Megatron

1006

Memorex

1005, 1006, 1010, 1017,
1035

Metz

1040, 1051, 1058

MGA

1004, 1005, 1006, 1008

Minerva

1039, 1058, 1059, 1064

Mitsubishi

1004, 1005, 1006, 1008,
1040, 1055, 1058

Mivar

1047, 1056, 1067

Motorola

1003, 1026

MTC

1004, 1005, 1006, 1022,
1055

Multitech

1009, 1035

NAD

1006, 1016

NEC

1003, 1004, 1005, 1006

Neckermann

1040, 1041, 1054, 1059,
1060

Nikkai

1045

Nikko

1006

Oceanic

1062

Onwa

1009

Rex

1045, 1062

RFT

1040

Roadstar

1035, 1045

Saba

1040, 1062, 1066, 1069

Saisho

1035, 1043, 1045, 1067,
1068

Salora

1062

Sambers

1056, 1067

Sampo

1004, 1006, 1025

Samsung

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,
1008, 1022, 1025, 1035,
1045, 1047, 1052, 1056,
1060, 1063, 1065

Sansui

1029

Sanyo

1004, 1010, 1017

SBR

1037, 1038

Schaub Lorenz

1069

Schneider

1068

Scott

1004, 1006, 1007, 1009,
1070

Sears

1001, 1004, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1015, 1016, 1017,
1028, 1034, 1070

Optonica

1021, 1026

Orion

1029, 1043, 1048, 1049,
1050, 1067, 1068

Osaki

1045, 1063

Otto Versand

1036, 1041, 1043, 1054,
1055, 1058, 1059, 1060,
1063

Palladium

1052

Siarem

1040, 1067

Panasonic

1003, 1012, 1014, 1031,
1044, 1046, 1051, 1061,
1062, 1069

Siemens

1041, 1042, 1058, 1059

Pathe Marconi

1066

SEG

1045, 1063

SEI

1036, 1040, 1048, 1067,
1068

Seleco

1062

Sharp

1004, 1006, 1007, 1021,
1023, 1025, 1026

Shorai

1048

Singer

1040

1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1014, 1018,
1040

Sinudyne

Philco

1036, 1040, 1043, 1067,
1068

Solavox

1062

Sonoko

1035

Philips

1003, 1004, 1007, 1008,
1014, 1018, 1019, 1020,
1037, 1038, 1040, 1053,
1059, 1060

Phoenix

1040

Phonola

1037, 1040

Pioneer

1004, 1006, 1027, 1062

Portland

1004, 1005, 1006, 1025

Price Club

1022

Prism

1012

Profex

1035

Proline

1049

Proscan

1001, 1034

Protech

1035, 1045, 1063

Proton

1004, 1006, 1007

Pye

1037

Sonolor

1062

Sony

1002, 1030, 1032, 1036,
1054

Soundesign

1004, 1006, 1009, 1070

Starlite

1009

Stern

1062

Sunkai

1043, 1048, 1049, 1050

Sylvania

1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,
1018, 1020

Symphonic

1009, 1028

Tandy

1026, 1062, 1063

Tashiko

1038, 1063

Tatung

1003, 1063, 1067

Tec

1063

Technics

1012, 1044, 1061

Telefunken

1066

Teletech

1035

Teleton

1063

Tensai

1048

Thomson

1066

Thorn

1054, 1055, 1058

Toshiba

1010, 1016, 1017, 1022,
1024, 1039

Totevision

1025

Triumph

1067

Universal

1011, 1019

Universum

1045, 1052, 1058

Voxson

1040, 1062

Waltham

1063

Wards

1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1008, 1011, 1014, 1018,
1019, 1020, 1021, 1034,
1070

Watt Radio

1068

Wega

1040

Yamaha

1004, 1005, 1006, 1008

Yoko

1045, 1063

Zenith

1004

Using the Remote Controller

TV
Manufacturer

133

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
Controlling a Satellite Tuner

On,
Standby

Controlling a VCR

Standby

Number
buttons

On,
Standby

TV
Input

Standby
TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

T V VOL

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

Clear

GHI

JKL

GHI

MNO

JKL

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

+10

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

MNO

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

Custom

Zone 3

Scroll wheel

Scroll wheel
Mode

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer

Enter

Top

M en

r
rve
Se

Input

Enter

Disc

Sleep

TV
Input

Top

VOL /

CH/Disc +/–

Men
u

r
rve
Se

+
VOL

M en

Aud
io

Enter

Disc

id e
Gu

turn

S etu

E xi

Prev
CH

Display

Prev
CH

Muting

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Main B

VOL

E xi
t

id e
Gu

turn

S etu

Random

Muting

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Main B

Random

Rec

Angle Last Memory

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Genre

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Ar tist

Location

VOL /
Muting

Display

Muting

Rec

A
DJ

/ / /

Mode

Men
u
Aud
io

Zone 2

Dimmer

Sleep

TV
Input

CH/Disc +/–

Mode

Macro

Ar tist

Genre

RC-554M
RC-555M

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source
and the remote controller mode for your satellite
tuner.
Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and
[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to
operate only the satellite tuner without changing the
input source, press the [Mode] button and roll the
scroll wheel to select “SAT.”
2. Point the remote controller at your satellite
tuner, and use the following buttons (you must
enter appropriate remote control code first).

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source
and the remote controller mode for your VCR.
Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and
[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to
operate only the VCR without changing the input
source, press the [Mode] button and roll the scroll
wheel to select “VCR.”
2. Point the remote controller at your VCR, and use
the following buttons (you must enter appropriate remote control code first).

On, Standby

Set the satellite tuner to On or
Standby

CH/Disc +/–

Select satellite channels

On, Standby

Set the VCR to On or Standby

CH/Disc +/–

Select TV channels
Play
Stop

Select menu items

Enter

Confirm selection

Number buttons

Enter numbers

Rewind
Fast forward
Pause

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.

134

VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

Rec ●

Record

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.
VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
Controlling a TV

Controlling a Cable Receiver

Standby
Input

Number
buttons

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

*
TV CH +/–*

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

T V VOL

TV VOL / *

TV
Input

@.-'/

ABC

DEF

T V CH

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

+10

Clear

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Standby
I

Number
buttons

MNO

7
PQRS

On,
Standby

TV
I

Custom

Zone 3

Mode
TV Input

Macro

Zone 2

Mode

Input

Dimmer
Top

M en

r
rve
Se

Mode

Input

TV
Input

Enter

id e
Gu

turn

S etu

E xi

Prev
CH

VOL /

CH/Disc +/–

Audio

Subtitle

r
rve
Se

Main B

Men
u
Aud
io

Enter

Disc

Prev
CH

Muting

VOL

E xi
t

id e
Gu

turn

S etu

Display

Muting

Main A

M en

Display

Rec

Top

+
VOL

Random

Angle Last Memory

Muting

Rec

Main A

Audio

Subtitle

Main B

Random

Angle Last Memory

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

Surround

THX

All CH ST

Stereo

A-B

Memory

Repeat

A-B

Memory

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Pure A

Direct

DSP

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Repeat

Video

Music

Photo

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Test Tone

CH SEL

Level -

Level +

Genre

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Location

Playlist

Album
Audio SEL

L Night

Re-EQ

Caps

Delete

Language

Ar tist

Location

Ar tist

Genre

RC-554M
RC-555M

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source
and the remote controller mode for your TV.
Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and
[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to
operate only the TV without changing the input
source, press the [Mode] button and roll the scroll
wheel to select “TV.”
2. Point the remote controller at your TV, and use
the following buttons (you must enter appropriate remote control code first).

1. Roll the scroll wheel to select the input source
and the remote controller mode for your cable
receiver.
Perform this operation while both the [Mode] and
[Input] buttons are not illuminated. If you want to
operate only the cable receiver without changing the
input source, press the [Mode] button and roll the
scroll wheel to select “CBL.”
2. Point the remote controller at your cable
receiver, and use the following buttons (you must
enter appropriate remote control code first).

On, Standby

Set the TV to On or Standby

TV on/off

On, Standby

TV CH +/–

Select TV channels

CH/Disc +/–

Select cable channels

Number buttons

Enter numbers

Number buttons

Enter numbers

CH/Disc +/–

Select cable channels

TV Input

Select TV or VCR input

TV VOL

Adjust the TV volume

* Buttons marked with an asterisk can always be used to control a
TV regardless of the currently selected remote controller mode.
These buttons do not work with the additional TV modes.

VOL /

Muting

Repeat

DSP

Scroll wheel

Sleep

Dimmer

Men
u
Aud
io

Zone 2

CH
Disc

/ / /

Mode

Macro

CH/Disc +/–

Scroll wheel

Sleep

TV
Input

T V VOL

#
Direct Tuning

--/---

Set the cable receiver to On or
Standby

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.
VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

The following buttons control the RDC-7.1.
VOL

Adjust the RDC-7.1 volume

Muting

Mute the RDC-7.1

135

Using the Remote Controller

On,
Standby

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands from Another
Remote Controller

You can teach the RDC-7.1’s remote controller new
commands simply by transmitting commands from
another remote controller one at a time. For example, by
transmitting the Play and Stop commands from your
CD player’s remote controller, the RDC-7.1’s remote
controller can be taught to transmit those commands
when its Play [
] and Stop [ ] buttons are pressed in
CD mode.
This is convenient when you want to add commands to
buttons after entering a remote control code (See page
129).

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.
Roll the scroll wheel to select
“LEARN,” and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
the remote controller mode you
want to teach a new command,
and then press the scroll wheel.

On the RDC-7.1’s remote controller, press the button you want to
teach the new command.

If you press a button that cannot be
taught a new command, the message
“RETRY” appears and you should press
another button.

136

Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5–
15 cm) apart, and then, on the
other remote controller, press the
button whose command you want
to learn.
When the command has been learned
successfully, “OK” appears on the display. You may need to press the button
several times.

If the command is not learned successfully, after the message “FAIL” has been
displayed, the mode select display reappears (step 3), and you should try again.

To teach the RDC-7.1’s remote
controller more new commands,
repeat steps 3 through 5.
Press the [Custom] button when you’ve
finished.

Notes:
• The following buttons cannot be taught new commands: [LIGHT], [Custom], [Macro], [Mode],
[Input], [Zone 2], [Zone 3], and the scroll wheel button.
• The RDC-7.1’s remote controller can learn a total of
150 commands. However, the commands of some
remote controllers may use a lot of memory, in which
case, this total will be reduced.
• If the message “FULL” appears, the remote controller cannot learn any more commands because its
memory is full.
• By default, the RDC-7.1’s remote controller knows
the commands for controlling an IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo CD player, cassette deck, DVD player, and
MD recorder (e.g., Play, Stop, Pause, etc., buttons).
You can teach these buttons new commands, although
the defaults will be restored if the remote controller is
reset.
• To teach a new command to a button that has already
been taught a command, simply repeat this procedure.
• Like most remote controllers, the RDC-7.1’s remote
controller uses infrared. Commands from remote
controllers that don’t use infrared cannot be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued

On the remote controller, press the
buttons whose actions you want to
program into the macro in the
order you want them performed.
To program the CD example in the left
column into a macro: press the scroll
wheel, press the [On] button, roll the
scroll wheel to select CD, press the
scroll wheel, and then press the Play
[
] button.
Actions are numbered from 1 to 8.

With the Macro function you can program the remote
controller to perform a sequence of actions with one
press of a button. For example, normally you need to
perform the following actions to use a CD player that’s
connected to the RDC-7.1:
1. Press the scroll wheel, (to select AMP mode).
2. Press the [On] button (to turn on the RDC-7.1).
3. Roll the scroll wheel to select CD (to select the
CD remote controller mode and the CD input
source).
4. Press the Play [
] button (to start the CD
player).
With the Macro function you can program the remote
controller to do all of this with one press of a button.

Macro #1 selected
8 actions learned

Making Macros

After each button is pressed, “SET” followed by “KEY” is displayed.
To add an action that selects an input
source for the main room, Zone, 2 or
Zone 3, press the [Input], [Zone 2], or
[Zone 3] button, respectively, roll the
scroll wheel to select the input source,
and then press the scroll wheel.

You can make up to eight macros, and each macro can
perform up to eight actions.

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.
Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MACRO,” and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“EDIT,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a
macro, and then press the scroll
wheel.
Macros are numbered from 1 to 8.

6
Macro

Using the Remote Controller

Using Macros

When you’ve finished, press the
Macro button.
After the following appears on the display, the display returns to normal.

Macro #1 selected
Action #1

137

Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued
Running Macros
Programmed macros can be run as follows.

Press the [Macro] button.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
macro’s number, and then press
the scroll wheel.
The actions in the macro are performed in the order in which they were
programmed.

Roll the scroll wheel to select a
character, and then press the
scroll wheel to set it.
The following characters are available.
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJK
L M N O P Q R ST UV W XY Z + – = < >
_ ¯¯ / \ * space
Macro #1 selected

1st character set

Naming Macros
You can name your macros as follows. Names may contain of up to five characters.

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MACRO,” and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“NAME,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
number of the macro that you want
to name, and then press the scroll
wheel.

Macro #1 selected
1st character

138

Repeat step 5 until you’ve entered
all 5 characters.
The previous menu reappears.
If the name you are entering consists of
less than five characters, enter spaces at
the end to fill all five places.

Other Settings for the Remote Controller
Adding New Remote Controller Modes
You can add additional modes (DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,
SAT) to the remote controller. This is useful if, for
example, you have several DVD players or TVs.

Reordering the Remote Controller Modes
You can change the order in which the remote controller
modes appear when you roll the scroll wheel. The position of the AMP mode cannot be changed.

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MODE,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“SORT,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
mode you want to move, and then
press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
mode before which you want to
insert the specified mode, and
then press the scroll wheel.
Here the specified mode will be inserted
before the “VCR” mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MODE,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“ADD,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
type of mode you want to add, and
then press the scroll wheel.

You can add up to 8 additional modes:
for example, 4 DVD, 2 TV, 1 VCR, and
1 CBL.

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Using the Remote Controller

Editing Remote Controller Modes

If the move is successful, after “OK” has
been displayed, the SORT display (step
3) reappears.

139

Other Settings for the Remote Controller—Continued
Deleting Remote Controller Modes

Assigning Remote Controller Modes

You can delete remote controller modes that you don’t
need, such as modes for components that you don’t
have.
The AMP mode cannot be deleted.

You can change the combination in selecting the input
source and remote controller mode simultaneously
using the scroll wheel. For example, when the input
source (top) is “TAPE1” and the remote controller
mode (bottom) is “AMP,” you can change only “AMP”
(the remote controller mode) to “CDR.”

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.
Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MODE,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“DEL,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
mode you want to delete, and then
press the scroll wheel.

1
Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“MODE,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“ASSGN,” and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select an
input source, and then press the
scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
mode you want to assign to the
specified input source, and then
press the scroll wheel.

If the mode is deleted successfully, after
“OK” has been displayed, the DEL display (step 3) reappears.

If the assignment is successful, after
“OK” has been displayed, the ASSGN
display (step 3) reappears.

140

Other Settings for the Remote Controller—Continued
Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Custom

Press and hold the [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom
mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“SETUP,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR/
RF,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “IR”
or “RF,” and then press the scroll
wheel.
When you select “IR.”

If you select “RF,” roll the scroll
wheel to select the same ID as the
RF receiver, and then press the
scroll wheel.
IDs 0 to 9 and A to F can be selected.

Roll the scroll wheel to select the
same channel as the RF receiver,
and then press the scroll wheel.
Channels 0 to 3 can be selected.
If the ID and channel have been set successfully, “OK” appears on the display.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“SETUP,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“RESET,” and then press the scroll
wheel.

Using the Remote Controller

Roll the scroll wheel to select
“YES,” and then press the scroll
wheel.
The remote controller is reset to its
default settings.

Using the Remote Controller with
Radio Frequency (RC-555M only)
You can set the remote controller’s transmission signal
format to either infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF).
The default setting is IR.
This is useful when, for example, the RDC-7.1 is
installed in a rack or is not in line of sight of the remote
controller as it allows you to use a commercially available RF receiver to pick up commands from the remote
controller, which are then fed to the RDC-7.1 via its IR
IN socket. For this to work, you must assign the same
ID and channel to the remote controller and RF receiver.

141

Other Settings for the Remote Controller—Continued
Changing the Remote Controller’s
Control ID
This section explains how to change the remote controller’s ID. You may need to change this if the RDC-7.1’s
remote controller interferes with other IntegraRESEARCH/
Onkyo components located in the same room.
Note:
If you change the remote controller’s ID, be sure to select
the same ID on the RDC-7.1. For details on setting up the
RDC-7.1’s remote control ID, refer to the “Remote Control Setup Sub-menu” section on page 91. The default ID
for both the RDC-7.1 and remote controller is 1.

142

Hold down the remote controller’s [Custom] button for more than three seconds.
The remote controller enters Custom mode.

Roll the scroll wheel to select “SETUP”
menu, and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select ID menu,
and then press the scroll wheel.

Roll the scroll wheel to select an
ID—1 (default), 2, or 3—and then
press the scroll wheel.
Select the same ID as that set on the
RDC-7.1.

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening
Mode
Note: Available listening modes may differ depending on your region and the option board installed.
Dolby Digital
Input Signal Format
Button

Type of source

Listening mode

PCM

Multichannel Multichannel
(*/2)
(Other than
*/2)

CD, TV, LD,
VHS, MD,
Vinyl, Radio,
Cassette, Cable,
Satellite, etc.

Dolby Digital/AAC
2ch

1/0

AAC
1+1

Analog Multichannel
5.1ch

7.1ch

DVD-Audio, Super
Audio CD

DVD, Digital cable/satellite, etc.

Direct

✔

Pure A

Pure Audio

✔

Stereo

✔

Multiplex
Dolby Pro Dolby Pro
Logic IIx
Logic II

Stereo

• PLII Movie

✔

• PLII Music

✔

• PLII Game

✔

• PLIIx Movie

✔

• PLIIx Music

✔

• PLIIx Game

✔

Dolby Digital/AAC

Surround

Dolby VS

✔

✔
✔

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔
✔

DTS
DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete
DTS-ES Matrix
✔

DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔

• NEO:6 Music

✔

Multichannel

✔

Miscellaneous

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVDAudio
i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD
THX

• THX Cinema

✔

THX

✔

✔
✔

✔

• THX SurroundEX

DSP, DSP

✔

• THX Music Mode
• THX Games Mode

✔
✔

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔

Mono

✔

All Ch Stereo

✔

Full Mono

✔

Mono Movie

✔

Enhance

✔

Orchestra

✔

Unplugged

✔

Studio-Mix

✔

TV Logic

✔

143

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode—Continued
DTS
Input Signal Format
Button

Multichannel Multichannel
(Other than
(*/2)
*/2)

DTS96/24
2/0

1/0

Type of source
Listening mode

Multichannel Multichannel
(Other than
(*/2)
*/2)

Matrix

2ch

1/0

Discrete/
Matrix

DVD, LD, CD, etc.

Direct

✔

Pure A

Pure Audio

✔

Stereo

✔

Multiplex
Dolby Pro Dolby Pro
Logic IIx
Logic II

Stereo

• PLII Movie

✔

• PLII Music

✔

• PLII Game

✔

• PLIIx Movie

✔

• PLIIx Music

✔

• PLIIx Game

✔

Surround

Dolby Digital/AAC
Dolby VS

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔

DTS

✔

✔
✔

DTS 96/24

✔

DTS-ES Discrete
DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔

✔*2

DTS-ES Matrix
✔

✔*2

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔

✔*2

• NEO:6 Music

✔

✔*2

Multichannel
i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVDAudio
i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD

DSP, DSP

THX

THX • THX Cinema

✔

• THX Music Mode

✔

• THX Games Mode

✔

• THX SurroundEX

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

Mono

✔

All Ch Stereo

✔

Full Mono

✔

Mono Movie

✔

Enhance

✔

Orchestra

✔

Unplugged

✔

Studio-Mix

✔

TV Logic

✔

*2 NEO:6-96k

144

✔

• THX Ultra2 Cinema

Relationship Between Input Source and Listening Mode—Continued
i.LINK(IEEE1394):
SACD

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVD-Audio
Input Signal Format
Button

Multichannel Multichannel
(*/2)
(Other than
*/2)

Type of source
Listening mode

2/0

1/0

1+1

176.4/192 Multichannel
kHz
(3/2)

DVD-Audio

2/0

Super Audio CD

Direct

✔

Pure A

Pure Audio

✔

Stereo

✔

Multiplex
Dolby Pro Dolby Pro
Logic IIx
Logic II

Stereo

• PLII Movie

✔

• PLII Music

✔

✔
✔

• PLII Game

✔

• PLIIx Movie

✔

• PLIIx Music

✔

• PLIIx Game

✔

Surround

Dolby Digital/AAC
Dolby VS

✔

Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX

✔

DTS
DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete
DTS-ES Matrix
DTS NEO:6 (NEO:6 Matrix)

✔

• NEO:6 Cinema

✔

• NEO:6 Music

✔

Multichannel
✔

✔

i.LINK(IEEE1394):SACD

DSP, DSP

THX

THX • THX Cinema
• THX Ultra2 Cinema

✔

• THX Music Mode

✔

• THX Games Mode

✔

• THX SurroundEX

✔

✔
✔
✔

✔

Miscellaneous

i.LINK(IEEE1394):DVDAudio

✔

Mono

✔

All Ch Stereo

✔

✔
✔

Full Mono

✔

Mono Movie

✔

Enhance

✔

Orchestra

✔

Unplugged

✔

Studio-Mix

✔

TV Logic

✔

145

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards
– USA, Canada, and Australian models only –
Types of the RDC-7.1 Option Boards
The following option boards are available for the RDC-7.1 as of November 2004.

C DIGITAL IN

AUDIO IN G

D DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

12 V
TRIGGER
OUT

RS 232

GND

IR IN
+12 V DC PWR SUPPLY
20mA MAX.

GND
MAIN
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

12 V
TRIGGER OUT
6

200mA MAX.

100mA MAX.

GND
D

OUT

( ASSIGNABLE)

( SINGLE )

TOTAL
100mA MAX.

( SINGLE )

( ASSIGNABLE)

R
FRONT

R
SUB
WOOFER

AC INLET

L
CENTER

CENTER

SURR

SURR BACK

( ASSIGNABLE)

SUBWOOFER

SURR BACK R

SURR R

FRONT R

CENTER

FRONT L

SURR L

PRE OUT A

MULTI
- CH

S VIDEO

VIDEO

IN 1

COMPONENT
VIDEO

IN 1

SURR BACK L

R
FRONT

( SINGLE)

SUB
WOOFER SURR

SURR BACK

PRE OUT B

IN 2

( ASSIGNABLE)

COMPONENT VIDEO

ANTENNA

( HD/BNC )

MODEL NO. RDC-7.1

HDMI

Y
SUB

SBR

SBL

IN 1
PB

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

PB
PR

FM
75

IN 3

OUT 1

IN 2

OUT

ETHERNET
( Net-Tune )

Y
SUB

SBR

SBL

4
OUT

MULTI
- CH

S VIDEO

VIDEO

PR
OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

IN 2

C-NET-A

C-MULTI

MULTI
- CH

C-VIDEO

C-CPNT-BNC

IN 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN 4
Y
SUB

SBR

SBL

OUT

DIGITAL IN
( BALANCED )

AES / EBU

C-AES

146

C-CPNT-RCA

C-AMFM

C-HDMI

UDD

100mA MAX.

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA, Canada, and Australian
models only –—Continued
Distribution regions (as of November 2004)

(the United States and Canada)

(Australia)

Product number: C-NET-A
Provides one Ethernet port for the Net Audio connection. Connecting the network server to the port allows you to enjoy
music stored on your PC or delivered from an Internet radio broadcast.
This option board will be inserted into slot B on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-MULTI
Provides two analog multichannel input terminal sets.
This option board will be inserted into slot E on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-AES
Provides one analog multichannel input terminal set and one AES/EBU digital audio input jack.
This option board will be inserted into slot E on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-VIDEO
Provides the following video connection terminals.
Composite video: Input × 6, Output × 4
S Video: Input × 6, Output × 4
Component video (RCA): Input × 3, Output × 1
This option board will be inserted over slots H and I on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-CPNT-BNC
Provides BNC-type component video terminals. One input terminal set and one output terminal set are available.
This option board will be inserted into slot J on the RDC-7.1.

Miscellaneous

Product number: C-CPNT-RCA
Provides RCA-type component video terminals. One input terminal set and one output terminal set are available.
This option board will be inserted into slot J on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-FMAM
Provides terminals for FM and AM tuners.
This option board will be inserted into slot K on the RDC-7.1.
Product number: C-HDMI
Provides HDMI terminals. Two input terminals and one output terminal are available.
This option board will be inserted into slot L on the RDC-7.1.

147

Using the RDC-7.1 with Option Boards – USA, Canada, and Australian
models only –—Continued
Installing the Option Boards (USA
and Australian Models Only)

The sub-panels are fixed to the RDC-7.1 with two
screws at the top and bottom, while the panel that
covers slots [H] and [I] is fixed with four screws
at the top and bottom. Keep the removed screws
for fixing the option board.

The option boards should be installed in their individual
designated slots. Installing the option board on a
different slot may cause failure.

TAL
D DIGI

Turn off the power and unplug the power
cord both from the RDC-7.1 and electrical
outlet.
Be sure to turn off the power of the RDC-7.1.
Inserting or removing an option board with the
RDC-7.1 turned on may cause failure.

OPT

1
1

2
2

3
3

4
4

S400

6
6

AUDIO

1
is a
K logo
The i.LIN s of Sony
trademarkon, registered
Corporati and other
in the U.S..
countries

COAXIAL

TAL
C DIGI ICAL
B
A

2
2

Take the option board out from the package carefully.
The option board incorporates many components,
terminals and connectors along with solderings
on its surface. Touching the board with your fingers may cause failure or damage from static electricity, incorrect contact and so on. When
handling the board, be sure to hold the outer part
or panel section of the board without touching the
board surface.

OUT

( ASSIGNABL

L
E)

( SINGL

SURR

CENTER

SURR

BACK

WOOFER

R
SUB FER
WOO

FRONT

SURR

SUB
T A
PRE OU

BACK
SURR NABL
E)
( ASSIG

Insert the option board along the rail
softly. When the board comes to the position where it stops but does not cover the
slot completely, push the board forward a
little bit more strongly.

Board
surface

TAL
D DIGI

COAXIAL

TAL
C DIGI ICAL

OPT

1
1

3
3

( Net-Tune)

ETHERNET

“Net-Tune”
is a trademark of
Onkyo Corporation.

4
4

S400

”
“Net -Tunemark of
on.
is a trade
Corporati
Onkyo
5

6
6

AUDIO

ET
ETHERN )
( Net -Tune

1
is a
K logo
The i.LIN s of Sony
trademarkon, registered
Corporati and other
in the U.S..
countries

2
2
OUT

( ASSIGNABL

L
( SINGLE

)

SURR

CENTER

SURR

BACK

WOOFER

Check the alphabet letter on the option
board.
The alphabet letter is printed at the top left corner
of the panel section.
B

”
of
“Net -Tune
emark
is a tradCorporation.
Onkyo

SURR

SUB FER
WOO

FRONT

SUB
T A
PRE OU

BACK
SURR NABL
E)
( ASSIG

Fix the option board firmly to the RDC-7.1
using the removed screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws firmly to the RDC-7.1.
If the screws are loose, contact failures for ground
or signal wires may occur at the section between the
RDC-7.1’ s slot terminal and the option board,
which may cause the RDC-7.1 or board to fail.

ET
ETHERN )

TAL
D DIGI

( Net -Tune

COAXIAL

TAL
C DIGI ICAL

OPT

1
1

2
2

3
3

”
“Net -Tunemark of
on.
is a trade
Corporati
Onkyo

4
4

S400
ETHERN

( Net -Tune

)

148

Remove the sub-panel with the same
alphabet letter as your option board from
the back of the RDC-7.1.
Use the supplied Allen wrench to loosen the
screw gradually, while holding the sub-panel so
that the panel will not drop down.

AUDIO

1
is a
K logo
The i.LIN s of Sony
trademarkon, registered
Corporati and other
in the U.S..
countries

2
2
OUT

( ASSIGNABL

L
( SINGLE

)

SURR

CENTER

SURR
WOOFER

R
FRONT

SUB FER
WOO

SURR

BACK
SURR NABL
E)
( ASSIG

SUB
T A
PRE OU

BACK

Troubleshooting

Power
Can’t turn on the RDC-7.1?
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the
wall outlet. And also, make sure that the other end of the
power cord is properly connected to the RDC-7.1’s AC
INLET.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five seconds or more, then plug the cord in again.
The RDC-7.1 turns off as soon as it’s turned on?
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immediately
and contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.
The [Standby] indicator on the RDC-7.1 remains lit?
• It is supposed that the RDC-7.1 is using a source in Zone 2
or 3. When not using, set both Zone 2 and 3 to “Off” (page
71).

Audio
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet?
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way.
• Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components are
connected properly (pages 25-44).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of
each speaker terminal on the power amplifier.
• Make sure that the input source is properly selected (pages
52, 53).
• Check the volume. It can be set from –81.5 to +18 (pages
52, 53).
The RDC-7.1 is designed for home theater enjoyment. It
has a wide volume range, allowing for precise adjustment.
• If the MUTING indicator is shown on the display, press the
remote controller’s [Muting] button to unmute the RDC-7.1
(page 54).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones
jack, no sound is output by the speakers (page 54).
• Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some games consoles, such as those that support
DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
• Make sure that the correct input signal audio format is
selected with the [Audio SEL] button (page 57).
• To use a turntable with an MC-type cartridge requires a
commercially available MC phono preamp (page 38).
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables is bent,
twisted, or damaged.
• Not all listening modes use all of the speakers.
• Specify the Speaker/Output Setup and Input Setup (pages
92-102).

Only the front speakers produce sound?
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the front
speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
only the front speakers produce sound.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 92).
Only the center speaker produces sound?
• If you use the Pro Logic II/IIx Movie or Pro Logic II/IIx
Music listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM
radio station or mono TV program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 92).
The surround speakers produce no sound?
• When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is
selected, the surround speakers produce no sound (page
58).
• Depending on the source and current listening mode, not
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.
Try selecting another listening mode.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 92).
The center speaker produces no sound?
• When the Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listening mode is
selected, the center speaker produces no sound (page 58).
• When the listening mode is set to “Mono,” no sound can be
present in the center speaker.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 92).
The surround back speakers produce no sound?
• The surround back speakers are not used with all listening
modes. Select another listening mode (pages 58-60).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround back
speakers with some sources.
• If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the
“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set
to “Off” (pages 106-112).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 92).
The subwoofer produces no sound?
• When you play source material that contains no information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (pages 92,
93).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format?
• Check the input signal format setting. Depending on the
playback source, you can select Auto, Multich, Analog, or
i.LINK (page 57).
• Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some games consoles, such as those that support
DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes cannot be selected (pages 143-145).
Can’t select the DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix or THX Surround EX listening modes?
• These modes cannot be selected when no surround back
speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is being used.
• If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the
“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set
to “Off” (pages 106-112).

Miscellaneous

If you have any trouble using your RDC-7.1, look for a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.

149

Troubleshooting—Continued
Can’t get 6.1 or 7.1 playback?
• If no surround back speakers are connected, or Zone 2/3 is
being used, 6.1 and 7.1 playback is not possible.
• If the “SB Mode (5ch)” is available in any sub-menu of the
“Listening Mode Setup” menu, make sure that it is not set
to “Off” (pages 106-112).
The volume cannot be set above 99?
• When the levels of all speakers have been calibrated (page
94), the maximum volume setting may change.
Noise can be heard?
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,
speaker cables, and so on may degrade the audio performance, so don’t do it.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work?
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital (page 56).
The multichannel input doesn’t work?
• Check the MULTI-CH IN connections (page 66).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to the
correct input source (page 66).
• Set the audio input signal format to Multich (page 67).
About DTS signals
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream
stops, the RDC-7.1 remains in DTS listening mode and the
DTS indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,
because the RDC-7.1 does not switch formats immediately,
you may not hear any sound, in which case you should stop
your player for about three seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to playback DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the RDC-7.1. This is usually
because the DTS bitstream has been processed (e.g., output
level, sampling rate, or frequency response changed) and
the RDC-7.1 doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal.
In such cases, you may hear noise.
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.

Video
There’s no picture?
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way.
• Make sure that each video component is properly connected.
• Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “Video
Assign” sub-menu under the “Input Setup” menu (page
99).
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the
RDC-7.1 is connected is selected.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the video
circuits are turned off and the RDC-7.1 outputs no video
signals.
The onscreen menus (OSD) don’t appear, or they
appear in an odd position?
• Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “Video
Output Assign” sub-menu under the “Speaker/Output
Setup” menu (page 92).

150

•
•

Make sure that the proper setting is made for the “OSD
Setup” sub-menu under the “Preference” menu (page 120).
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the
RDC-7.1 is connected is selected.

Tuner
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy, or
the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t appear?
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the RDC-7.1 away from your TV or computer.
• Press the [Tuning Mode] button to turn off the “AUTO”
indicator, bringing the FM mode to monaural (page 62).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
When the RDC-7.1 is unplugged or a power failure
occurred:
• Normally, the built-in memory retains its contents for 2
weeks. If it loses radio presets, make the presets again.

Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work?
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct
polarity (page 9).
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries
or old and new batteries (page 9).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away
from the RDC-7.1, and that there’s no obstruction between
the remote controller and the RDC-7.1’s remote control
sensor (page 9).
• Make sure that the RDC-7.1 is not subjected to direct sunshine or inverter type fluorescent lights. Relocate if necessary.
• If the RDC-7.1 is installed in a rack or cabinet with colored
glass doors, the remote controller may not work reliably
when the doors are closed.
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode (page 51).
• When using the remote controller to control other manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not work as
expected.
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control ID.
• If you change the remote controller’s transmission signal
format to RF, be sure to select the same ID as the RF
receiver.
Can’t control other components?
• If it’s an IntegraRESEARCH component, make sure that
the
cable and analog audio cable (RCA/phono) are
connected properly. Connecting only an
cable won’t
work (page 45).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode (page 51).

Troubleshooting—Continued

Recording
Can’t record?
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is selected
(e.g., digital or analog).
• Make sure that proper output settings are made for the connected devices. Settings are available in the “Rec Out” of
the “Audio Output Assign” and “Video Output Assign”
sub-menus under the “Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages
95, 96).

Zone 2/Zone 3
Zone 2/3 has turned off?
• Was the Sleep function set? The Sleep function turns off
Zone 2/3 as well as the RDC-7.1. To set the Sleep function
for Zone 2/3 only, see page 69.
There’s no sound?
• Recording and Zone 3 operations use the same circuit and
therefore cannot be used at the same time. Make sure that
proper settings are made for outputs. Settings are available
in “Zone 2 Out” or “Zone 3 Out” of the “Audio Output
Assign” and “Video Output Assign” sub-menus under the
“Speaker/Output Setup” menu (pages 95, 96).
The Surr Back speaker setting doesn’t appear?
• If no surround back speakers are connected, or the surround
back outputs are being used with Zone 2/3, this setting is
unavailable.

Net-Tune

Can’t get a list of Internet radio stations from the XivaNet online database?
• Try again later.
Can’t access music on the selected server, or can’t
connect to the server?
• Make sure that your Net-Tune server is turned on.
• Add the MP3, WMA, and WAV files on your Net-Tune
server.
• Set the RDC-7.1’s [Power] switch to Off, wait five seconds,
and then set it to On again. If that doesn’t help, restart your
Net-Tune server.
• On the Client Sub-menu, make sure that the NTSP Port setting is set to the same port number as Net-Tune Central.
Correct as necessary (page 123).
Can’t select albums?
• Use the Net-Tune server to add album names to your music
files.
Can’t select artists?
• Use the Net-Tune server to add artist names to your music
files.
Can’t select by genre?
• Use the Net-Tune server to add genre names to your music
files.
No playlists are available?
• Use the Net-Tune server to create some playlists.

Others
The sound changes when I connect my headphones?
• When a pair of headphones is connected, its listening mode
changes depending on the mode that was set before it was
connected.
Can’t change a setting?
• Some settings are not available while using Net-Tune.
Can’t use an audio adjust function?
• Some audio adjust functions can’t be used with certain listening modes.
The display doesn’t work?
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected.

Can’t access Internet radio or the Net-Tune server?
• Check the connection between the RDC-7.1 and the LAN
port on your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure that the Network Setup settings are correct (page
122).
Playback stops while listening to Net-Tune tracks?
• Make sure that your Net-Tune server meets the system
requirements listed on pages 74, 76.
• If the Net-Tune server is serving WAV files to several clients at the same time, the network may become overloaded
and playback may be interrupted. This can be resolved by
preparing an Ethernet network exclusively for use with
Net-Tune, separating it from general network traffic, and by
using switches to improve network performance.

151

Miscellaneous

Can’t learn commands from other remote controllers?
• Make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that cannot
be used for learning? Some commands cannot be learned,
especially those that transmit several instructions with a
single button press.

Troubleshooting—Continued

Specifications
– USA and Canadian models –

Error Messages
“Not available with Headphones use”
• Operation not allowed while a pair of headphones is connected.
“Not available in this Sp Config”
• Doesn’t work with the current speaker configuration.
“Only available with Dolby D”
• Can be used with only Dolby Digital.
“Not available with this signal”
• Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.
“Not available with Muting”
• Operation not allowed because the RDC-7.1 is currently
muted.
“Not available in this Listening Mode”
• Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.
“Not available with NET AUDIO use”
• Operation not possible with Net Audio selected for the
input source.
“Not available with Dolby Headphone Off”
• Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function off.
“Not available with Dolby Headphone On”
• Doesn’t work with the Dolby Headphone function on.
“Not available with zone2 out in Line out”
• Operation not possible with “1-8. f. Zone 2 Out” set to
“Line Out.”
“Not available with zone3 out in Line out”
• Operation not possible with “1-8. g. Zone 3 Out” set to
“Line Out.”
Memory backup
The RDC-7.1 uses a battery-less memory backup system in order to retain radio presets and other settings
when it is unplugged or in the case of a power failure.
Although no batteries are required, the RDC-7.1 must
be plugged into an AC outlet in order to charge the
backup system.
(On other than USA, Canadian, and Australian models,
the RDC-7.1’s Power switch must be set to On in order
to charge the backup system). Once it has been
charged, the RDC-7.1 will retain the settings for several
weeks, although this depends on the environment and
time will be shorter in humid climates.
The RDC-7.1 contains a microcomputer for signal processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
back in again.
To reset the RDC-7.1 to its factory defaults, turn it on
and, while holding down the [Video 1] button, press the
[Standby/On] button. When the reset is complete,
“CLEAR” appears on the display and the RDC-7.1
enters Standby mode.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental
fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the
unit’s malfunction. Before you record important data,
make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.

152

General
Power Supply Rating:
Consumption Power:
Standby Power Consumption:
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Weight:
Inputs:
Audio
Multichannel (7.1ch) Inputs:
Phono (MM):
Line inputs:
Digital inputs Coaxial:
Digital inputs Optical:
Digital inputs AES/EBU
Video (Option)
Composite Video inputs:
S Video inputs:
Component Video RCA
inputs:
Component Video BNC
input:
Audio and Video
HDMI inputs (19-pin):
Miscellaneous
IR in (phoenix connector):
Outputs:
Audio
Balanced Pre out A:
Unbalanced Pre out A:
Unbalanced Pre out B:
Headphones:
Line outputs:
Digital outputs Coaxial:
Digital outputs Optical:

AC 120 V, 60 Hz
1.0 A
3.9 W
17 11/16" × 7 3/4" × 18 13/16"
(450 × 197.3 × 477.1 mm)
45.6 lbs (20.7 kg)
1 or 2 (option)
1
9 (assignable)
6
6 (assignable)
1 (option)
6 (assignable)
6 (assignable)
3 or 4
1
2 (option)
3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer
Subwoofer
1
5 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)
2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)
2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)

Video (Option)
Composite Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B,
Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)
1 (fixed, Monitor out A)
S Video outputs:
3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B
and Recout)
1 (fixed, Monitor out A)
Component Video RCA
outputs:
1 or 2
Component Video BNC
output:
1
Audio and Video
HDMI output (19-pin):
1
Miscellaneous
12V Trigger out (phoenix
connector):
5 (for A, B, C, D, E)
Inputs/Outputs:
Miscellaneous
i. LINK(AUDIO) (4 pin): 2
Ethernet (Net-Tune):
1 (option)
(1/8-inch mini-jack): 1
RS232 (9 pin D-SUB
Female connector):
1
Antennas:
FM:
75 ohms unbalanced
AM:
Included loop antenna and external
terminal
AC Inlet:
1 (IEC type)

Specifications – USA and Canadian models –—Continued
Amplifier Section

Tuner Section

Maximum Output Level:
8.5 Vrms
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion):
0.05% (1 Vrms output)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance:
Audio
200 mV, 50 kΩ (AUDIO IN 1-9)
2.5 mV, 50 kΩ (PHONO MM)
200 mV, 50 kΩ (MULTI IN FR/FL/
C/SR/SL/SBR/SBL) (Option)
36 mV, 50 kΩ (MULTI IN SUB)
(Option)
0.5 Vp-p, 75 Ω (DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 1-6)
1.3 Vp-p, 110 Ω (DIGITAL IN
(balanced) AES/EBU) (Option)
Video (DVD, VIDEO 1-5)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Composite Video)
(Option)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (S Video, Y signal)
0.28 Vp-p, 75 Ω (S Video, C signal)
Component (Option)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Y)
0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (PB/CB, PR/CR)
Output Level and Impedance:
Audio
AUDIO 1-5:
200 mV, 470 Ω (Tape 1/2/ Video
1/2/3 Rec Out)
100 mV, 470 Ω (Zone 2/3 Out
(fixed))
1 V, 470 Ω (Zone 2/3 Out (variable))
PRE OUT A:
1 V, 470 Ω (Front L/R, CENTER,
SURR L/R, SURR BACK or
Zone 2 L/R, SUB WOOFER)
PRE OUT B:
1 V, 470 Ω (SUB WOOFER)
Video (Option)
VIDEO 1-4
(Composite Video):
1 Vp-p 75 Ω (Monitor Out A/B,
Video 1/2/3 Rec Out, Zone 2/3
Out)
VIDEO 1-4
(S Video, Y signal):
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Monitor Out A/B,
Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)
VIDEO 1-4
(S Video, C signal):
0.28 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Monitor Out
A/B, Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)
COMPONENT VIDEO:
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Y)
0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (PB/CB, PR/CR)
Phono Overload:
120 mV RMS at 1,000 Hz, 0.5%
THD
Frequency Response:
Audio (CD in Direct mode) 5 Hz-100 kHz: +1/–3 dB
Video Component
10 Hz-50 MHz: +1/–3 dB
RIAA Deviation:
20-20 kHz: ±0.8 dB
Tone Control:
±12 dB at 50 Hz (Bass)
±12 dB at 1,000 Hz (Mid)
±12 dB at 20,000 Hz (Treble)
S/N (Direct mode):
80 dB (PHONO, IHF A, 5 mV
input)
95 dB (LINE, IHF A, 0.5V input)
Muting:
Due to setup menu

FM
Tuning frequency Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Stereo
Mono
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Mono
Stereo
Capture Ratio:
Image Rejection Ratio:
IF Rejection Ratio:
S/N:
Mono
Stereo
Alternate Channel Attenuation:
Mono
Selectivity:
AM Suppression Ratio:
Harmonic Distortion:
Mono
Stereo
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Stereo Threshold:

87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 200 kHz
steps
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 Ω IHF)
23 µV (75 Ω DIN)
11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75 Ω IHF)
0.9 µV (75 Ω DIN)
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 ohms)
37.2 dBf, 20.0 µV (75 ohms)
2.0 dB
40 dB
90 dB
76 dB, IHF
70 dB, IHF
55 dB IHF
50 dB DIN
50 dB
0.2%
0.3%
30 to 15,000 Hz, +/–1.0 dB
45 dB at 1,000 Hz
30 dB at 100 to 10,000 Hz
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 Ω)

AM
Tuning frequency Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Image Rejection Ratio:
IF Rejection Ratio:
S/N:
THD:

530 to 1710 kHz, 10 kHz steps
30 µV
40 dB
40 dB
40 dB
0.7%

Miscellaneous

Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.

153

Specifications – Other than USA and Canadian models –
General
Power Supply Rating:
European & Australian models: AC 230-240 V, 50 Hz
Asian models:
AC 220-230 volts, 50 Hz
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Consumption Power:
European & Australian models: 100 W
Asian models:
100 W
Standby Power Consumption: 3.9 W
Dimensions (W × H × D):
450 × 197.3 × 477.1 mm
(17 11/16" × 7 3/4" × 18 13/16")
Weight:
21.7 kg (47.8 lbs)
Inputs:
Audio
Multichannel (7.1ch) Inputs: 1
Phono (MM):
1
Line inputs:
9 (assignable)
Digital inputs Coaxial:
6
Digital inputs Optical:
6 (assignable)
Digital inputs AES/EBU
1
Video (Option)
Composite Video inputs: 6 (assignable)
S Video inputs:
6 (assignable)
Component Video RCA
inputs:
3
Component Video BNC
input:
1
Audio and Video
HDMI inputs (19-pin):
2
Miscellaneous
IR in (1/8-inch mini-jack): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)
Outputs:
Audio
Balanced Pre out A:
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer
Unbalanced Pre out A:
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer
Unbalanced Pre out B:
Subwoofer
Headphones:
1
Line outputs:
5 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)
Digital outputs Coaxial:
2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)
Digital outputs Optical:
2 (assignable to Recout, Zone 2 out
and Zone 3 out)
Video
Composite Video outputs: 3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B,
Recout, Zone 2 out and Zone 3 out)
1 (fixed, Monitor out A)
S Video outputs:
3 (assignable to Monitor out A/B
and Recout)
1 (fixed, Monitor out A)
Component Video RCA
outputs:
1
Component Video BNC
output:
1
Audio and Video
HDMI output (19-pin):
1
Miscellaneous
IR out (1/8-inch mini-jack): 3 (for Main, Zone 2 and Zone 3)
12V Trigger out (1/8-inch
mini-jack):
5 (for A, B, C, D, E)
Inputs/Outputs:
Miscellaneous
i. LINK(AUDIO) (4 pin): 2
Ethernet (Net-Tune):
1 (option)
(1/8-inch mini-jack): 1
RS232 (9 pin D-SUB
Female connector):
1

154

Antennas:
FM:
AM:
AC Inlet:

75 ohms unbalanced
Included loop antenna and external
terminal
1 (IEC type)

Amplifier Section
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion):
0.05% (1 Vrms output)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance:
Audio
200 mV, 50 kΩ (AUDIO IN 1-9)
2.5 mV, 50 kΩ (PHONO MM)
200 mV, 50 kΩ (MULTI IN FR/FL/
C/SR/SL/SBR/SBL)
36 mV, 50 kΩ (MULTI IN SUB)
0.5 Vp-p, 75 Ω (DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 1-6)
1.3 Vp-p, 110 Ω (DIGITAL IN
(balanced) AES/EBU)
Video (DVD, VIDEO 1-5)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Composite Video)
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (S Video, Y signal)
0.28 Vp-p, 75 Ω (S Video, C signal)
Component
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Y)
0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (PB/CB, PR/CR)
Output Level and Impedance:
Audio
AUDIO 1-5:
200 mV, 470 Ω (Tape 1/2/ Video
1/2/3 Rec Out)
100 mV, 470 Ω (Zone 2/3 Out
(fixed))
1 V, 470 Ω (Zone 2/3 Out (variable))
PRE OUT A:
1 V, 470 Ω (Front L/R, CENTER,
SURR L/R, SURR BACK or
Zone 2 L/R, SUB WOOFER)
PRE OUT B:
1 V, 470 Ω (SUB WOOFER)
Video
VIDEO 1-4
(Composite Video):
1 Vp-p 75 Ω (Monitor Out A/B,
Video 1/2/3 Rec Out, Zone 2/3
Out)
VIDEO 1-4
(S Video, Y signal):
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (Monitor Out A/B,
Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)
VIDEO 1-4
(S Video, C signal):
0.28 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Monitor Out
A/B, Video 1/2/3 Rec Out)
COMPONENT VIDEO:
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms (Y)
0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms (PB/CB, PR/CR)
Phono Overload:
120 mV RMS at 1,000 Hz, 0.5%
THD
Frequency Response:
Audio (CD in Direct mode) 5 Hz-100 kHz: +1/–3 dB
Video Component
10 Hz-50 MHz: +1/–3 dB
RIAA Deviation:
20-20 kHz: ±0.8 dB
Tone Control:
±12 dB at 50 Hz (Bass)
±12 dB at 1,000 Hz (Mid)
±12 dB at 20,000 Hz (Treble)
S/N (Direct mode):
80 dB (PHONO, IHF A, 5 mV
input)
95 dB (LINE, IHF A, 0.5V input)
Muting:
Due to setup menu

Specifications – Other than USA and Canadian models –—Continued
Tuner Section
FM
Tuning frequency Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Stereo
Mono
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Mono
Stereo
Capture Ratio:
Image Rejection Ratio:
IF Rejection Ratio:
S/N:
Mono
Stereo
Alternate Channel Attenuation:
Mono
Selectivity:
AM Suppression Ratio:
Harmonic Distortion:
Mono
Stereo
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
Stereo Threshold:

87.50 to 108.00 MHz, 50 kHz steps
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 Ω IHF)
23 µV (75 Ω DIN)
11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75 Ω IHF)
0.9 µV (75 Ω DIN)
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 ohms)
37.2 dBf, 20.0 µV (75 ohms)
2.0 dB
85 dB
90 dB
76 dB, IHF
70 dB, IHF
55 dB IHF
50 dB DIN
50 dB
0.2%
0.3%
30 to 15,000 Hz, +/–1.0 dB
45 dB at 1,000 Hz
30 dB at 100 to 10,000 Hz
17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 Ω)

AM
Tuning frequency Range:
European & Australian models:522 to 1611 kHz, 9 kHz steps
Asian models:
522 to 1611 kHz, 9 kHz steps or
530 to 1710 kHz, 10 kHz steps
*selectable
Usable Sensitivity:
30 µV
Image Rejection Ratio:
40 dB
IF Rejection Ratio:
40 dB
S/N:
40 dB
THD:
0.7%

Miscellaneous

Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.

155

Integra Research Division of
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124 http://www.onkyo.com/
Integra Research Division of
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integraresearch.com
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Units 2102-2107, Metroplaza Tower I, 223 Hing Fong Road, Kwai Chung, N.T., HONG KONG
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039 http://www.ch.onkyo.com/
SN 29343686

Printed in Japan
D0411-1

* 2 9 3 4 3 6 8 6 *

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2004:11:05 16:05:11Z
Modify Date                     : 2004:11:05 22:10:50+09:00
Page Count                      : 156
Creation Date                   : 2004:11:05 16:05:11Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Macintosh
Mod Date                        : 2004:11:05 22:10:50+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:11:05 22:10:50+09:00
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Integra RDC 7.1 User Manual To The 1797e61f C155 4025 A7a0 3aacfb78b8b7

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation